JP6792879B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game in which a plurality of identification information is displayed in a variable manner and generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result.

Based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening, a variable display device capable of executing a special figure variable display game that variablely displays the special figure identification information, and a plurality of decorative identification information corresponding to the special figure variable display game. Ornamental display with variable display Based on a decorative variable display device capable of executing a variable display game, a game control device that controls the game in an integrated manner and controls the special figure variable display game, and a control signal from the game control device. , The effect control device for controlling the decoration variation display game, and when the stop result mode of the special figure variation display game becomes a predetermined special result mode, the game value can be given to the player. In a game machine, as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, a game machine including a fluctuation pattern selection means for selecting a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of reach fluctuations is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). That is, a game machine capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects is known.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-138827

However, the conventional game machine has not been able to sufficiently enhance the interest of reach production.
An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of reach production.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed and the result of the game becomes a special result.
A variation pattern selection means for selecting the variation pattern of the game, and
A variation effect means for executing a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means is provided.
The variable effect means can execute the first reach effect, the second reach effect, and the third reach effect.
The variation pattern selection means uses the variation pattern for executing the third reach effect as a variation pattern.
A first pattern in which the second reach effect is executed after the execution of the first reach effect, and the third reach effect is executed after the execution of the second reach effect, and
After executing the first reach effect, a second pattern in which the third reach effect is executed without executing the second reach effect, and
The first reach effect and the third pattern in which the third reach effect is executed without executing the second reach effect can be selected.
Of the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern, the fluctuation pattern with the highest expectation that the result of the game will be a special result is the third pattern, and the result of the game is a special result. The variation pattern with the lowest expectation is the second pattern.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of reach production.

It is a front view of the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is an exploded perspective view and the side view of the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the lower plate unit. It is a figure explaining the lower plate unit. It is a figure explaining the front frame unit. It is a figure explaining the front frame unit. It is a figure explaining the front frame unit. It is a figure explaining the speaker decoration. It is a figure explaining the hitting ball launching apparatus and the foul ball catching unit. It is a figure explaining the hitting ball launching apparatus. It is a figure explaining the foul ball catch unit. It is a figure explaining the foul ball catch unit. It is a figure explaining the foul ball catch unit. It is a figure explaining the precision plate unit. It is a figure explaining the effect button. It is a figure explaining the unit main body part. It is a figure explaining the water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining the water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining the water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining the water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining the viewing window part. It is a figure explaining the viewing window part. It is a figure explaining the front frame light emitting unit. It is a figure explaining the front frame light emitting unit. It is a figure explaining the front frame light emitting unit. It is a figure explaining the sphere flow path unit. It is a figure explaining the sphere flow path unit. It is a figure explaining the sphere flow path unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display device. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead jackpot determination process. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart illustrating game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating an information setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating the information setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1 and the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a small hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining an example of a look-ahead effect. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production.

<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 30) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

A model name display unit 16 for displaying the model name of the game machine 10 is provided on the upper part of the glass frame 15.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the glass frame 15, the upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying the game ball to the hit ball launcher 240 (see FIG. 10) and the payout unit provided on the back surface side of the game machine 10 are paid out. An upper plate ball outlet 22 or the like is provided so that the game ball can flow out. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a (see FIG. 32) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, the effect button 25 also has a built-in drive source (vibration motor 251a (see FIG. 16) which is a kind of frame effect device) for vibrating the effect button 25. That is, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function that gives a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25. The effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a protruding state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is above the normal state). You may.

Below the front frame 12, a lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device 240, and the like are provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card is ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine. Return button (discharge button) 27b to operate, balance indicator (balance display) 27c to display the balance of the prepaid card, upper plate operation lever to operate to let the game ball in the upper plate 21 flow down to the lower plate 23 27d, a mobile terminal holder 28 and the like for placing a mobile terminal such as a smartphone owned by the player are provided. Further, on the left side of the effect button 25, a volume adjusting button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device 240 directs the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the cross key 29, the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 30). It can be performed.

FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the game machine 10, and FIG. 3B is a left side view of the game machine 10.
For example, as shown in FIG. 3A, the front frame 12 includes an inner frame unit 12a and a lower plate unit 12b mounted on the lower portion of the inner frame unit 12a on the front surface side. Further, the glass frame 15 includes a front frame unit 15a and a top unit 15b mounted on the upper portion of the front frame unit 15a on the front surface side.

Of the portions surrounding the game board 30 of the front frame unit 15a, the lower portion 15a1 (including the inside of the upper plate 21), the left side portion 15a2, and the right side portion 15a3 are formed of black members. During the game, the player pays attention to the game board 30 (particularly the display device 41 and the winning opening), but at that time, the part surrounding the game board 30 is also in sight, so a low-brightness color is selected as the color of that part. By doing so, it is possible to alleviate the oppressive feeling given to the player by the game board 30 (including the portion surrounding the game board 30).

Further, by selecting a low-brightness color as the color of the portion surrounding the game board 30, the low-brightness portion is provided on the light emitting device (for example, the board decoration device 46) provided on the game board 30 and the glass frame 15. Since the light emitting device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) can be separated from the light emitting device, the light emission of the light emitting device provided on the glass frame 15 can be made conspicuous. Further, when the effect button 25 is configured to be convertible into a protruding state, the effect button 25 overlaps the lower portion 15a1 in the front-rear direction when the effect button 25 is in the protruding state. That is, when the effect button 25 is in the protruding state, the appearance of the low-brightness portion changes, so that it is possible to suppress overlooking the state change of the effect button 25. The color of the portion surrounding the game board 30 (lower portion 15a1, left portion 15a2, right portion 15a3) is not limited to black as long as it is a low-brightness color.

A model name display unit 16 is provided on the front surface of the top unit 15b. The model name display unit 16 is configured by sandwiching a sheet on which the model name is displayed between a clear cover that protects the front surface (display surface) of the sheet and a base member, and only the sheet is replaced. You can change the model name with. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the entire top unit 15b for each model, so that the cost can be reduced.
From the viewpoint of alleviating the oppressive feeling given to the player by the top unit 15b, enhancing the effect of the top unit 15b, and the like, the top unit 15b can perform predetermined operations such as forward / backward movement and vertical movement. It may be configured as follows.

For example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the front side of the top unit 15b is inclined so that the upper end is located on the front side of the lower end. That is, the top unit 15b faces the player side sitting in front of the game machine 10. As a result, the top unit 15b can be made to look larger, so that the effect of the top unit 15b can be enhanced.
Further, the degree of protrusion of the upper part of the game machine 10 to the front is substantially the same as the degree of protrusion of the lower part of the game machine 10 to the front. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3B, for example, the degree of protrusion of the upper part The degree is slightly larger than the degree of protrusion at the bottom. It should be noted that the degree of protrusion of the upper portion may be smaller than the degree of protrusion of the lower portion, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player hits his head against the top unit 15b. Become.

<Lower plate unit>
FIG. 4A is a perspective view of the lower plate unit 12b viewed from the front right side, and FIG. 4B is a perspective view of the lower plate unit 12b viewed from the front left side. 5 (a) is a plan view of the lower plate unit 12b, FIG. 5 (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 5 (a), and FIG. 5 (c) is FIG. 5 (b). ) Is an enlarged view of the main part.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4A, a call button 27f operated by a player to call a clerk of a game store is provided on the left side of the lower plate 23. When the call button 27f is operated, a signal is transmitted to the data lamp in the game store as external information, and the data lamp lights up.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the flow path in which the game ball flows down from the payout unit to the lower plate 23 and the downstream portion 231 of the flow path in which the game ball flows down from the upper plate 21 to the lower plate 23 are the same. The upper surface is covered with the cover member 231a. The downstream portion 231 also serves as a storage space for storing game balls when the lower plate 23 is full.
The cover member 231a is a transparent member and turns whitish when the surface is damaged. When a fraudulent act using a foul ball (second fraudulent act described later) is performed, the thread member rubs against the cover member 231a and the surface of the cover member 231a is scratched. Therefore, depending on the color of the cover member 231a. It is possible to confirm whether or not cheating has been committed. Further, since the cover member 231a is detachably provided on the lower plate unit 12b, only the cover member 213a can be replaced. Therefore, it is difficult to find a new scratch (a new fraudulent act) when the cover member 231a is damaged, but when the cover member 231a is damaged, the cover member 231a is replaced. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not a new fraudulent act has been committed.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 4 (b) and 5 (a), the lower plate 23 has a ball discharge port 232 that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction and an opening / closing door that opens and closes the ball discharge port 232. A 233 and a lower plate ball removing lever 234 are provided. By operating the lower plate ball removing lever 234, the opening / closing door 233 can be opened, and the game ball in the lower plate 23 can be discharged downward from the ball discharge port 232. The ball discharge port 232 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the vertical direction, and its diameter D3 (see FIG. 5C) is about 35 mm (that is, three times or more the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, the game ball in the lower plate 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the lower surface of the lower plate 23 (that is, the upper surface of the bottom surface portion of the lower plate 23) is inclined toward the ball discharge port 232. Therefore, even when the number of game balls in the lower plate 23 is small, the game balls in the lower plate 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232.
Further, the distance D1 (see FIG. 4B) between the end (exit) of the downstream portion 231 and the ball discharge port 232 is set to about 9 mm (that is, less than the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, when the number of game balls in the lower plate 23 is small, the game balls flowing out from the downstream portion 231 immediately move onto the opening / closing door 233 and stay on the opening / closing door 233, so that the game balls in the lower plate 23 move. Even if the number is small, the game balls in the lower plate 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the left end of the cover member 231a is located on the left side of the end (exit) of the downstream portion 231. For example, as shown in FIG. 5A, the cover member 231a The left end portion overlaps a part of the ball discharge port 232 in the vertical direction. That is, at the end of the downstream portion 231 is provided an eave that protrudes toward the ball discharge port 232 side. As a result, the upper surface opening of the lower plate 23 is reduced (that is, the intrusion of dust and the like into the lower plate 23 is suppressed) while ensuring the capacity of the lower plate 23.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, the rear surface 23a in the lower plate 23 is inclined so that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end. As a result, the capacity of the lower plate 23 is increased without enlarging the upper surface opening of the lower plate 23.

Further, since the rear surface 23a in the lower plate 23 is inclined so that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end, when the player manually scrapes the game ball from the lower plate 23, the scraping operation is performed. Cheap. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the rear surface 23a is provided with a stepped portion 235 which is one step deeper. Therefore, when the game ball is scraped out by hand, the step portion 235 becomes a space for bending the finger, so that the scraping operation becomes easier.

For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, the distance D21 between the upper surface of the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 and the lower surface of the bottom surface is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Specifically, for example, the game ball. It is set to be 1.5 times or more the diameter of the game ball and less than twice the diameter of the game ball. In addition, in FIG. 5C, a game ball is shown by a two-dot chain line.
Further, the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 233 is less than the diameter of the game ball, and specifically, for example, about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball. It is set. Therefore, since the opening / closing door 233 is one step lower than the upper surface of the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, the game ball tends to stay on the opening / closing door 233. Further, since the step (distance D22) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball and the game ball on the opening / closing door 233 can be easily scraped out, the game ball can be easily taken out from the lower plate 23.

Further, since the step (distance D22) is set to about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, the game ball sandwiched between the opening / closing door 233 (specifically, the peripheral surface of the ball discharge port 232 and the opening / closing door 233). When the game ball (the game ball sandwiched between the side of the door) returns to the top, it easily returns to the inside of the lower plate 23. That is, if the step (distance D22) is too small, the game ball sandwiched between the opening / closing doors 233 may be pushed out vigorously by the closing force of the opening / closing door 233 and pop out from the lower plate 23. Since the step (distance D22) is set to about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, the inconvenience of popping out from the lower plate 23 is unlikely to occur even if the door is pushed out vigorously by the closing force of the opening / closing door 233. Easy to return to the lower plate 23.

Further, the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 and the lower surface of the opening / closing door 233 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and specifically, for example, about 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. It is set. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 233 is opened and the game ball in the lower plate 23 is discharged from the ball discharge port 232, the game ball is guided downward (guided toward the lower ball box) by the ball discharge port 232. Can be done. Furthermore, when the game ball sandwiched between the opening / closing door 233 comes out downward, it is difficult to scatter even if it is pushed out vigorously by the closing force of the opening / closing door 233 (the scattering direction is restricted by the ball discharge port 232), so that it is outside the ball box. The inconvenience of falling into the door is unlikely to occur.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game machine provided with the storage unit (lower plate 23) capable of storing the game ball, the storage unit is the game ball stored on the bottom surface of the storage unit. A through hole (ball discharge port 232) for discharging the through hole and an opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) for opening and closing the through hole are provided, and the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface portion and the lower surface of the opening / closing member is the bottom surface portion. The distance between the upper surface and the upper surface of the opening / closing member is longer than D22 (see FIG. 5C).
Therefore, the usability of the storage unit (lower plate 23) can be improved. Specifically, since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening / closing member is shorter than the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface and the lower surface of the opening / closing member, the game ball in the storage portion is taken out by hand. At that time, the game ball fitted in the step (distance D22) between the upper surface of the bottom surface of the storage portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233), that is, the game ball on the opening / closing member can be easily scraped out, which is convenient. good. In addition, when the number of game balls in the storage unit is small, the game balls are accumulated on the opening / closing member. Therefore, even when the number of game balls in the storage unit is small, the game balls in the storage unit are pierced through the hole (ball discharge port 232). Can be discharged smoothly from. Further, since the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface portion and the lower surface of the opening / closing member is longer than the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member, when the game ball in the storage portion is discharged from the through hole. The through hole can guide the game ball downward, which is convenient.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) is less than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower surface of the bottom surface portion and the lower surface of the opening / closing member. The distance D23 between and the ball can be configured to be greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball.
With such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the usability of the storage unit (lower plate 23). Specifically, since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, when the game ball in the storage unit is taken out by hand, the storage unit The step (distance D22) between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) does not interfere with the operation of scraping the game ball, and is easy to use. Further, since the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface portion and the lower surface of the opening / closing member is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the through hole is used when the game ball in the storage portion is discharged from the through hole (ball discharge port 232). The game ball can be guided downward with high accuracy, which is convenient.

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a game machine provided with a storage unit (lower plate 23) capable of storing game balls, the storage unit stores the stored game balls on the bottom surface of the storage unit. A through hole for discharging (ball discharge port 232) and an opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233) for opening and closing the through hole are provided, and the width of the through hole (diameter D3 of the ball discharge port 232) opens and closes with the upper surface of the bottom surface. The distance to the top surface of the member is greater than D22 (see FIG. 5C).
Therefore, the usability of the storage unit (lower plate 23) can be improved. Specifically, since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member is smaller than the width of the through hole (diameter D3 of the ball discharge port 232), when the game ball in the storage portion is taken out by hand. , The game ball fitted in the step (distance D22) between the upper surface of the bottom surface of the storage portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member (opening / closing door 233), that is, the game ball on the opening / closing member can be easily scraped out, which is convenient. In addition, when the number of game balls in the storage unit is small, the game balls are accumulated on the opening / closing member. Therefore, even when the number of game balls in the storage unit is small, the game balls in the storage unit are pierced through the hole (ball discharge port 232). Can be discharged smoothly from. Further, since the width of the through hole (diameter D3 of the ball discharge port 232) is larger than the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface portion and the upper surface of the opening / closing member, the game ball in the storage portion can be smoothly discharged from the through hole. It is easy to use.
In the present embodiment, the ball discharge port 232 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the vertical direction, but the shape of the ball discharge port 232 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the ball discharge port 232 has a substantially elliptical shape when viewed from the vertical direction. You may be. When the ball discharge port 232 has a substantially elliptical shape, for example, the minor diameter of the ball discharge port 232 corresponds to the width of the through hole.

<Front frame unit>
FIG. 6A is an exploded perspective view of the front frame unit 15a, and FIG. 6B is a rear view (rear view) of the front frame unit 15a. FIG. 7 is a side sectional view of the front frame unit 15a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the front frame unit 15a is mounted on the front frame main body 151 and the upper left and upper right portions of the front side of the front frame main body 151, respectively. The 152, the upper plate unit 153 mounted on the lower portion of the front frame main body 151 on the front side, and the front frame light emitting unit 154 mounted on the left and right portions of the front side of the front frame main body 151, respectively. It is configured to include a cover member 155 attached to each of the upper left portion and the upper right portion on the rear surface side of the front frame main body portion 151.

For example, as shown in FIG. 6A, upper speakers 19a are attached to the upper left portion and the upper right portion on the front side of the front frame main body portion 151, respectively. The upper speaker 19a on the left side is attached in an inclined state so that the upper end is located on the front side of the lower end and the left end is located on the front side of the right end. Further, the upper speaker 19a on the right side is attached in a state of being tilted so that the upper end is located on the front side of the lower end and the right end is located on the front side of the left end. That is, both the left and right upper speakers 19a are attached in a state in which the sound radiated from the front side thereof is tilted diagonally downward and inward.

The upper speaker 19a is covered with the speaker decoration 152 from the front. That is, the speaker decoration 152 prevents the sound from the upper speaker 19a from being directly transmitted to the player. Specifically, the sound radiated from the front side of the upper speaker 19a is reflected by the speaker decoration 152 toward the cover glass 14, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 7, and then is reflected by the cover glass 14 to the game machine. It is reflected toward the player who sits in front of the 10. Therefore, when the sound from the upper speaker 19a is high-pitched, the player may feel uncomfortable if the sound is directly transmitted to the player, but in the case of the present embodiment, the sound is not directly transmitted to the player, so that the player You can reduce discomfort and increase your interest. Further, when the sound from the upper speaker 19a (particularly the bass) collides with the cover glass 14, it sounds as if the sound is output from the entire cover glass 14, which enhances the interest. Further, since the sound from the upper speaker 19a can be restricted from leaking to the outside by the speaker decoration 152, the sound from the upper speaker 19a can be easily heard, and the interest is enhanced.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the lower portion of the upper speaker 19a on the rear surface side is separated from the cover glass 14. Therefore, the sound radiated from the lower part on the rear surface side of the upper speaker 19a is reflected by the cover glass 14 and heads toward the player sitting in front of the game machine 10, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 7, for example. Become. Therefore, not only the sound radiated from the front side of the upper speaker 19a but also a part of the sound radiated from the rear side of the upper speaker 19a can be transmitted to the player, so that the volume can be suppressed.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 6B and 7, since the upper speaker 19a is covered with the cover member 155 from the rear, the sound radiated from the rear surface side of the upper speaker 19a is confined inside the cover member 155. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sound from the upper speaker 19a from leaking to the rear of the game machine 10.
Further, by running the wiring from the upper speaker 19a on the outer surface of the cover member 155, the wiring from the upper speaker 19a can be kept away from the cover glass 14, so that the cover glass 14 can be easily attached and detached. Further, the cover member 155 also has a role of preventing an illegal act such as a piano wire or the like from entering the inside of the game machine 10 through a gap between the upper speaker 19a and the glass frame 15. In FIG. 6B, the upper speaker 19a is not shown.

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the game machine 10. FIG. 9A is a perspective view of the speaker decoration 152 on the right side as viewed from the front right side, and FIG. 9B is a perspective view of the speaker decoration 152 on the right side as viewed from the front left side.
For example, as shown in FIG. 8, a top light emitting portion 15b1 which is a kind of frame decoration device 18 is provided on the right side of the top unit 15b. Similarly, a top light emitting portion 15b1 which is a kind of frame decoration device 18 is provided on the left side of the top unit 15b. By emitting light from the top light emitting unit 15b1, it is possible to appeal to the player on the side of the game machine 10 (such as the island entrance of the game store).

For example, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 (a) and 9 (b), the speaker decoration 152 is provided with a diffuse reflection portion 152a that diffusely reflects light, and an upper reflection portion 152b and a lower reflection portion 152c that reflect light. Has been done.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the diffusely reflecting portion 152a has a random uneven surface, and by diffusely reflecting light on the uneven surface, the diffused reflecting portion 152a emits light rearward from the top light emitting portion 15b1. The generated light can be reflected toward the front, the upper reflecting portion 152b, and the lower reflecting portion 152c.

Further, the upper reflecting portion 152b has a plurality of first reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the front side, and a plurality of second reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the rear side. The first reflecting surface and the second reflecting surface reflect light from the top light emitting unit 15b1 (including light incident from the top light emitting unit 15b1 via the diffused reflecting unit 152a). The first reflecting surface and the second reflecting surface are alternately arranged, the first reflecting surface faces the front side from the second reflecting surface, and the width W1 of the first reflecting surface is the width of the second reflecting surface. Is almost the same as.
Further, the lower reflecting portion 152c has a plurality of third reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the front side, and a plurality of fourth reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively toward the rear side. The third reflecting surface and the fourth reflecting surface reflect light from the top light emitting unit 15b1 (including light incident from the top light emitting unit 15b1 via the diffused reflecting unit 152a and / or the upper reflecting unit 152b). The third reflecting surface and the fourth reflecting surface are arranged alternately, the third reflecting surface faces the front side from the fourth reflecting surface, and the width W2 of the third reflecting surface is the width of the fourth reflecting surface. Is almost the same as.

Since the lower reflecting portion 152c is farther from the top light emitting portion 15b1 than the upper reflecting portion 152b, the amount of light incident on the lower reflecting portion 152c is smaller than the amount of light incident on the upper reflecting portion 152b. Therefore, when the width W2 of the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c is the same as the width W1 of the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b, the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflecting portion 152c is increased. The amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflecting portion 152b is smaller than that of the upper reflecting portion 152b, and the lower reflecting portion 152c looks darker than the upper reflecting portion 152b. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflecting portion 152c and the amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflecting portion 152b are equal to that of the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c. The width W2 is wider than the width W1 of the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b. As described above, in the present embodiment, the amount of light reflected by the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c is adjusted by the width of the reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c.

Further, in the present embodiment, the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflecting portion 152c and the amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflecting portion 152b are equal to each other on the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c. The orientation is different from the orientation of the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b. Specifically, since the third reflective surface faces the outside of the first reflective surface, the light from the outside of the game machine 10 (for example, the light from the adjacent gaming machine) is the third light from the first reflective surface. It is often incident on the reflecting surface. That is, the lower reflecting portion 152c is configured so that the small amount of incident light from the top light emitting portion 15b1 can be compensated for by the amount of incident light from the outside. As described above, in the present embodiment, the amount of light reflected by the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c is adjusted according to the orientation of the reflecting surfaces of the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c.
Further, the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c is located outside the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b and faces the outside of the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b. As a result, the top unit 15b can be made to look larger at the time of light emission, so that the effect of the top unit 15b can be enhanced.

<Striking ball launcher and foul ball catching unit>
FIG. 10 is a front view of the inner frame unit 12a, which is an enlarged view of the lower part of the inner frame unit 12a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 10, a hitting ball launching device 240 and a foul ball catching unit 210 are mounted on the lower portion of the inner frame unit 12a on the front surface side. The game ball stored in the upper plate 21 is supplied to the hit ball launching device 240 arranged at the lower part of the front frame 12. The game ball launched by the launching punch 241 of the hitting ball launching device 240 is guided to the gaming area 32 by the launching rail 242 formed at the lower part of the front frame 12 so as to ascend from the lower right to the upper left. When the launching force is weak, the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device 240 fouls as a foul ball (a game ball returned without being launched into the game area 32), for example, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. It is collected by the ball catch unit 210 and supplied to the lower plate 23.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10, the hitting ball launching device 240 includes a cutting blade 243 that cuts the thread when a game ball (illegal ball) to which a thread is attached is launched from the hitting ball launching device 240.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game ball (illegal ball) to which a thin thread (thread member) is attached is launched into the game area 32, and the thread member is operated from the upper plate 21 to illegally enter a winning opening or the like. There may be cheating to win a prize. As a countermeasure against fraudulent acts using such fraudulent balls, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a cutting blade 243 that cuts a thread member of the fraudulent ball.

11 (a) is a front view of the hitting ball launching device 240, FIG. 11 (b) is a front side perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 240, and FIG. 11 (c) is a front side perspective view of the cutting blade 243. It is a figure.
For example, as shown in FIG. 11A, the hit ball launching device 240 is provided with a taxiway 244 that guides the game ball supplied from the front (glass frame 15 side) to the launching position. The game machine 10 includes a supply path (not shown) for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 to the hitting ball launching device 240. That is, the game machine 10 has a supply path (not shown) provided on the glass frame 15 side and a front frame 12 side as a passage for guiding the game ball stored in the upper plate 21 to the launch position of the hit ball launching device 240. It is provided with a taxiway 244 provided in. When the glass frame 15 is in the closed state, the outlet portion of the supply passage and the inlet portion 244a of the guideway 244 are connected so that the supply passage and the guideway 244 communicate with each other.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the entrance portion 244a of the taxiway 244 is provided on the cover member 245 of the ball striking device 240. The inlet portion 244a is formed as an opening that penetrates the cover member 245 in the front-rear direction.
The cover member 245 is provided with a thread guiding portion 246 capable of guiding the thread member of the illegal ball toward the cutting edge portion of the cutting blade 243 when the illegal ball is launched. The thread guide portion 246 is an opening that penetrates the cover member 245 in the front-rear direction, and is cut out so as to connect to the upper portion of the left end of the inlet portion 244a of the guideway 244. That is, the thread guide portion 246 and the inlet portion 244a are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The cutting blade 243 is attached to the cover member 245 so that the cutting edge portion thereof is located inside the thread guiding portion 246.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11C, the cutting blade 243 is a flat plate-shaped first plate-shaped base end portion 243a, which is connected to the base end portion 243a and extends in the same plane as the base end portion 243a. It includes a tip portion 243b and a flat plate-shaped second tip portion 243c that is connected to the base end portion 243a and is bent rearward from the base end portion 243a. The first tip portion 243b and the second tip portion 243c are arranged vertically, and the gap portion 243d formed between the tip portions 243b and 243c (boundary) cuts the thread member of the illegal ball. It becomes.
The tip surface 243b1 (right side surface) of the first tip portion 243b and the tip surface 243c1 (right side surface) of the second tip portion 243c descend toward the gap portion 243d so as to guide the thread member of the illegal ball to the gap portion 243d. It is formed as an inclined surface. The cutting blade 243 is fixed to the cover member 245 in a state of being accommodated in the accommodating recess formed on the rear surface side of the cover member 245.

In the cutting mechanism configured as described above, when the illegal ball is launched by the hitting ball launching device 240, the thread member of the illegal ball is guided to the cutting blade 243 by the thread guiding portion 246, and the cutting blade 243. It bites into the gap 243d of. Then, the thread member that bites into the gap 243d is pulled and cut by the firing force of the illegal ball. The thread guide portion 246 is cut out at the end of the inlet portion 244a so as to be connected to the inlet portion 244a of the taxiway 244, and the cutting blade 243 is arranged at a recessed position of the thread guide portion 246. It is possible to cut the thread member of an illegal ball without hindering the flow of the ball.

The launch rail 242 is configured to guide the game ball launched from the launch position to the upper left. The thread guide portion 246 is formed so as to be connected to the left end portion of the inlet portion 244a of the guideway 244, and the cutting blade 243 is arranged so that the cutting edge portion thereof faces the right side. In this way, the thread guiding portion 246 is provided on the side portion of the inlet portion 244a on the game ball launching direction side, and the cutting edge portion of the cutting blade 243 is provided in the direction opposite to the game ball launching direction. It is possible to cut reliably.

12 (a) is a front view of the foul ball catch unit 210, and FIG. 12 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul ball catch unit 210. 13 (a) is a perspective view of the upper surface of the foul ball catch unit 210, and FIG. 13 (b) is a perspective view of the rear surface of the foul ball catch unit 210. 14 (a) is a rear view (rear view) of the foul ball catch unit 210, FIG. 14 (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is a sectional view taken along line BB. , FIG. 14 (b) is an enlarged view of a main part.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the foul ball catch unit 210 includes a base member 211 and a part member 212 mounted on the rear surface side of the base member 211. On the front side of the base member 211, a caution display 211a for calling attention to the hook 210a for locking the foul ball catch unit 210 to the inner frame unit 12a is provided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the foul ball catch unit 210 has a foul ball (a game ball that has flowed back without being launched into the game area 32 even though it has been fired) on the rear surface side of the base member 211. The first foul ball inflow port 213a and the second foul ball inflow port 213b, the payout ball inflow port 213c into which the game ball paid out with the upper plate 21 full, and the inflow port 213a, It is provided with a ball outlet 213d for discharging the game ball flowing into the 213b and 213c to the outside of the foul ball catch unit 210. The game ball discharged from the ball outlet 213d is supplied to the lower plate 23.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the foul ball catch unit 210 has a first flow path 214a on the rear surface side of the base member 211, through which the game ball flowing into the first foul ball inflow port 213a flows down. A second flow path 214b through which the game ball flowing into the payout ball inflow port 213c flows down, and a third flow path 214c that guides the game ball passing through the first flow path 214a and the second flow path 214b to the ball outflow port 213d. It is provided with a fourth flow path 214d for guiding the game ball flowing into the second foul ball inflow port 213b to the ball outflow port 213d.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the base member 211 is provided with a window portion 211b for preventing static electricity from accumulating. The window portion 211b is an opening that penetrates the base member 211 in the front-rear direction, and the game ball in the flow path provided on the rear surface side of the base member 211 can be visually recognized from the front side of the base member 211 through the window portion 211b. It is possible.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 12B, a reinforcing rib 211c for reinforcing the base member 211 provided with a flow path through which the game ball flows down is provided on the front side of the base member 211. Has been done. The reinforcing rib 211c also has a role of preventing sink marks during molding.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12B, the part member 212 is provided with a protrusion 212a projecting upward and a reinforcing rib 212b for the protrusion 212a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (a), the protrusion 212a is arranged between the first foul ball inflow port 213a and the second foul ball inflow port 213b. Since the second foul ball inflow port 213b is arranged on the right side (on the ball launching device 240 side) of the first foul ball inflow port 213a, the foul ball that could not cross the protrusion 212a at the time of launch is the first foul ball. 2 It flows into the foul ball inflow port 213b. On the other hand, the foul ball that has crossed the protrusion 212a at the time of launch may flow into the first foul ball inlet 213a if it cannot cross the protrusion 212a at the time of backflow, and may cross the protrusion 212a at the time of backflow. If it is possible, it will flow into the second foul ball inflow port 213b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13B, when a game ball (illegal ball) to which a thread is attached flows into the first foul ball inflow port 213a as a foul ball, the foul ball catch unit 210 sandwiches the thread. The unit 215 is provided.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as described above, a game ball (illegal ball) to which a thin thread (thread member) is attached is launched into the game area 32, and the thread member is operated from the upper plate 21 to be illegal. There are cases where fraudulent acts (hereinafter referred to as "first fraudulent acts") are performed that allow the player to win a prize in the winning slot. The first fraudulent activity can be avoided by the cutting blade 243 of the ball launching device 240.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, two game balls are further connected by a thin thread (thread member), and one game ball is launched to intentionally make a foul ball (that is, a foul ball catch is intentionally made). After being collected by the unit 210 and dropped on the lower plate 23), the other game ball is launched into the game area 32, and the thread member is operated from the lower plate 23 to illegally win a prize in the winning opening or the like. An act (hereinafter referred to as "second fraudulent act") may be performed. The second fraudulent act is that the hand operating the thread member is hidden by the lower plate 23 and is difficult to see, and the operation of operating the thread member is mistaken for the operation of moving the game ball from the lower plate 23 to the upper plate 21. Hard to find for some reason.

In the case of the second fraudulent act, since the firing force of one of the game balls launched first is weak, the thread member is not cut even if it bites into the gap 243d of the cutting blade 243. Further, even if the thread member bites into the gap portion 243d of the cutting blade 243, the thread member is detached from the cutting blade 243 by firing the other game ball thereafter. Therefore, the second fraudulent activity cannot be avoided by the cutting blade 243. As a countermeasure against such a second fraudulent act, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a sandwiching portion 215 for sandwiching the thread member of the fraudulent ball.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 13 (b) and 14 (b), the sandwiching portion 215 has a front protruding portion 216 provided on the base member 211 and protruding rearward, and a front protruding portion 216 provided on the part member 212. It is a gap formed between (boundary) and the rear protruding portion 217.
The first flow path 214a provided on the rear surface side of the base member 211 is a flow path formed so as to guide the game ball flowing into the first foul ball inflow port 213a to the left and then downward. The upstream portion (the portion that guides the game ball to the left) of the first flow path 214a is provided between the base member 211 and the part member 212, and the game ball has protrusions 216 and 216 when passing through the upstream portion. The upper surface of 217 (that is, above the sandwiching portion 215) is rolled.

Further, the third flow path 214c provided on the rear surface side of the base member 211 is a flow path formed so as to guide the game balls from the first flow path 214a and the second flow path 214b to the right. The third flow path 214c is provided below the protrusions 216 and 217 (that is, below the sandwiching portion 215). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inflow port 213a moves to the left above the sandwiching portion 215 and falls from the protrusions 216 and 217, and then moves to the right below the sandwiching portion 215. It is discharged from the ball outlet 213d.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14B, the sandwiching portion 215 is a slit extending in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the game ball rolls above the sandwiching portion 215 (flows down the upstream portion of the first flow path 214a), it also rolls below the sandwiching portion 215 (third flow path 214c). When (flowing down), it also flows down along the extending direction of the sandwiching portion 215.
For example, as shown in FIG. 14C, the right portion of the front surface (the surface facing the front protruding portion 216) of the rear protruding portion 217 is the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216 (the surface facing the rear protruding portion 217). Is in contact with. On the other hand, the left portion of the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217 is an inclined surface gradually separated from the front protruding portion 216. That is, a tapered sandwiching portion 215 (gap) is formed between the left portion of the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216 and the left portion of the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217 with the left end open and the right end closed. ing. Therefore, the thread member of the illegal ball can enter from the left end of the sandwiching portion 215.
Further, the tip surface 216a (left side surface) of the front side protrusion 216 and the tip surface 217a (left side surface) of the rear side protrusion 217 are formed on the sandwiching portion 215 so as to guide the thread member of the illegal ball to the sandwiching portion 215. It is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward.

The left portion of the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217 (that is, the inclined surface gradually separated from the front protruding portion 216) includes a first inclined surface 217b and a second inclined surface 217c having a gentler inclination than the first inclined surface 217b. Consists of.
The first inclined surface 217b having a steeper inclination is provided on the left end (open end) side of the sandwiching portion 215. As a result, at the open end of the sandwiching portion 215, the distance between the front protruding portion 216 and the rear protruding portion 217 can be increased, so that the thread member of the illegal ball easily enters the sandwiching portion 215.
The second inclined surface 217c having a gentler inclination is provided on the right end (closed end) side of the sandwiching portion 215. As a result, it is possible to take a long portion where the force for sandwiching the thread member of the illegal ball is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, so that the thread member of the illegal ball can be effectively sandwiched and the operation of the thread member becomes difficult. Not only that, it is possible to make it difficult to collect the thread member.

In the sandwiching mechanism configured as described above, of the two illegal spheres connected by the thread member, the illegal ball launched first flows down the third flow path 214c as a foul ball through the first flow path 214a. At that time, the thread member enters from the left end of the sandwiching portion 215. Then, the thread member that has entered the sandwiching portion 215 is pulled by the flow force of the illegal ball and sandwiched between the sandwiching portions 215. Since the sandwiching portion 215 is arranged along the flow direction of the game ball, it is possible to sandwich the thread member of the illegal ball without hindering the flow of the game ball.

The first flow path 214a is configured to guide the game ball flowing into the first foul ball inflow port 213a to the left above the sandwiching portion 215 and then supply it below the sandwiching portion 215. The third flow path 214c is configured to guide the game ball supplied below the sandwiching portion 215 to the right below the sandwiching portion 215. The sandwiching portion 215 is arranged so that the open end faces the left side. In this way, the open end of the sandwiching portion 215 is provided in the same direction as the flow direction of the game ball above the sandwiching portion 215, and in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball below the sandwiching portion 215. By providing the thread member of the illegal ball, the thread member can be reliably sandwiched.

Both the first foul ball inlet 213a into which the foul ball flows in and the ball outlet 213d from which the foul ball is discharged are arranged on the right side of the open end of the sandwiching portion 215, and the sandwiching portion 215 Is a shape that tapers from the left side to the right side. Therefore, when one of the illegal balls launched earlier flows in from the first foul ball inflow port 213a and is discharged from the ball outflow port 213d, the thread member of the illegal ball is abbreviated in the foul ball catch unit 210. It is in a bent state. As a result, the other illegal ball is launched into the game area 32 to pull the other end side of the thread member (the other illegal ball side), or the thread member is operated from the lower plate 23 to cause the thread member. By pulling one end side (one fraudulent ball side that has become a foul ball), the force that moves the part sandwiched between the thread member sandwiching portions 215 to the right side (closed end side) is the thread member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably pinch the thread member of the illegal ball.

Specifically, for example, in the thread member, one of the illegal balls launched earlier flows in from the first foul ball inflow port 213a and is discharged from the ball outflow port 213d, so that the open end of the sandwiching portion 215 It is sandwiched between the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216 and the first inclined surface 217b of the rear protruding portion 217. Next, the thread member is pulled on the other end side by the firing force when the other illegal ball is launched into the game area 32, so that the rear surface of the front side protrusion 216 and the first inclined surface of the rear side protrusion 217 are pulled. It moves from the position sandwiched between the front protruding portion 216 to the position sandwiched between the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216 and the second inclined surface 217c of the rear protruding portion 217, and is sandwiched by the sandwiching portion 215. After that, since one end side of the thread member is pulled by being operated from the lower plate 23, the thread member is sandwiched between the rear surface of the front side protrusion 216 and the second inclined surface 217c of the rear side protrusion 217 toward the closed end. And move. Therefore, as the operation from the lower plate 23 of the thread member is repeated, the thread member is gradually pinched by the sandwiching portion 215, and the thread member finally becomes immobile, which makes it difficult to operate the thread member. Not only that, it becomes difficult to collect the thread member. Therefore, since evidence of fraudulent activity may remain, it is possible to effectively avoid the second fraudulent activity.

It is also possible to provide an inclined surface on the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216 to form the sandwiching portion 215 without providing the inclined surface on the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217, or to form the sandwiching portion 215 with the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216. It is also possible to provide inclined surfaces on both the front surfaces of the rear protruding portion 217 to form the sandwiching portion 215. However, when the thread member of the illegal ball is operated from the lower plate 23, the thread member is pressed against the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216. Therefore, if an inclined surface is provided on the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216, the thread member is provided by the inclined surface. May be guided in a direction away from the sandwiching portion 215. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sandwiching portion 215 is formed by providing the inclined surfaces 217b and 217c on the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217 without providing the inclined surface on the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216.
Further, the surface of the foul ball catch unit 210 that comes into contact with the thread member of the illegal ball (for example, the left portion of the rear surface of the front protruding portion 216 and / or the left portion of the front surface of the rear protruding portion 217) may be provided with irregularities. .. As a result, the frictional resistance between the foul ball catch unit 210 and the thread member becomes large, and the thread member is easily caught, so that the second fraudulent act can be effectively avoided.

Further, the second fraudulent act using the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inflow port 213a can be avoided by the sandwiching portion 215 of the foul ball catch unit 210. On the other hand, the foul ball may flow into the second foul ball inflow port 213b, and the second fraudulent act using the game ball flowing into the second foul ball inflow port 213b cannot be avoided by the sandwiching portion 215. Therefore, as a countermeasure against the second fraudulent act using the game ball that has flowed into the second foul ball inflow port 213b, for example, the upper end of the rib 211d (see FIG. 13A) forming the second foul ball inflow port 213b. A notch may be provided in the like.

Further, for example, it is formed by the lower ends of the ribs 211e, 211f, 211g (see FIG. 13B) forming the ball outlet 213d, the corners formed by the ribs 211e and the ribs 211g, and the ribs 211f and the ribs 211g. Notches may be provided in the corners and the like. As a result, the thread member of the fraudulent ball becomes more difficult to operate, so that it is possible to effectively avoid the second fraudulent act using the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inflow port 213a.
Further, by providing notches at the lower ends of the ribs 211e, 211f and 211g and at the corners formed by these ribs, the second foul ball inflow port 213b can be provided without notching at the upper end of the ribs 211d. It is possible to avoid the second fraudulent act using the inflowing game ball. Further, by providing notches at the lower ends of the ribs 211e, 211f, 211g and the corners formed by these ribs, and by providing notches at the upper end of the ribs 211d, the material flows into the second foul ball inflow port 213b. It is possible to effectively avoid the second fraudulent act using the game ball.
Further, the second foul ball inflow port 213b may not be provided. That is, all the foul balls may be configured to flow into the first foul ball inflow port 213a.

<Plate unit>
FIG. 15A is an exploded perspective view of the upper plate unit 153, and FIG. 15B is a plan view of the upper plate unit 153.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the upper plate unit 153 is configured to include a unit main body portion 260 and an effect button 25 mounted from above at the central portion of the unit main body portion 260. .. The upper plate unit 153 is installed in the lower part of the glass frame 15 and is configured as a protruding unit projecting forward of the game machine 10.
For example, as shown in FIG. 15A, an opening 260a is formed at the center position of the upper surface of the unit main body 260. The opening 260a is for allowing the effect button 25 to be inserted into the unit main body 260, and the lower portion of the effect button 25 is arranged in the unit main body 260 via the opening 260a.

The effect button 25 is detachably attached to and detachable from the unit body 260 via a shaft portion 25b projecting from the bottom surface of the effect button 25 and a support member 260b projecting from the bottom surface of the unit body 260. Provided. Each support member 260b of the unit main body portion 260 is formed at a position corresponding to each shaft portion 25b of the effect button 25, and internally has a screw hole for a screw connecting the shaft portion 25b and the support member 260b. Have.
Further, the support member 260b is configured to be inclined toward the front side of the game machine 10. Therefore, the effect button 25 supported by the support member 260b is also tilted toward the front side of the game machine 10. As a result, the operation surface of the effect button 25 can be arranged toward the player sitting in front of the game machine 10, and the operability can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, a lending button (ball lending button) 27a, a return button (discharging button) 27b, and a balance indicator (balance display section) 27c are on the upper surface of the unit main body 260. , Upper plate operation lever 27d, mobile terminal holder 28, volume adjusting button 27e, cross key 29, and the like are provided.
The mobile terminal placing portion 28 is provided with a plurality of (three in the case of the present embodiment) groove portions 28a. Each groove 28a is arranged so that the extending direction has a different angle with respect to the left-right direction. Therefore, the player can place the mobile terminal in the mobile terminal placing portion 28 in a stable state by selecting the groove portion 28a according to the size of the mobile terminal.

FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the effect button 25.
For example, as shown in FIG. 16, the effect button 25 includes a button unit base 251, a button lower base 252, a reflector base 253, a reflector 254, an inner lower lens 255, an inner upper lens 256, and a button. It is configured to include a lens decoration 257, a button lens 258, and a button frame 259. Among these members, the button lens 258, the button lens decoration 257, and the button bottom base 252 sink when the effect button 25 is pressed.

A vibration motor 251a is attached to the central portion of the button unit base 251, and the entire effect button 25 vibrates when the vibration motor 251a operates. That is, the vibration function of vibrating the effect button 25 is achieved by the vibration motor 251a. Further, the effect button switch 25a is attached to the button unit base 251.
The button lower base 252 is a member arranged on the upper surface side of the button unit base 251 and is projected downward from the bottomed tubular base body 252a having an open upper surface and the bottom surface of the base body 252a. It is configured to include a plurality of (four in the case of the present embodiment) urging members 252b. The urging member 252b is, for example, a spring, and its tip abuts on the button unit base 251 to urge the base main body 252a away from the button unit base 251 (upward).

When the effect button 25 is pressed, the base main body 252a moves in a direction that opposes the urging force of the urging member 252b. That is, since the base main body 252a moves in the direction (downward) approaching the button unit base 251 when the effect button 25 is pressed, the button unit base 251 alleviates the impact when it collides with the base main body 252a. A cushioning member 251b is attached.
A shading plate 252c is attached to the bottom surface of the base main body 252a, and when the effect button 25 is pressed and the separation distance between the base main body 252a and the button unit base 251 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value, the shading plate 252c Is arranged between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the effect button switch 25a attached to the button unit base 251. The effect button switch 25a outputs a signal indicating that the effect button 25 has been pressed when the light from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is blocked by the light shielding plate 252c.

The reflector base 253 is a substantially annular member that inclines downward toward the central opening 253a, and is engaged with the button unit base 251 from above the button lower base 252. The upper surface of the reflector base 253 is subjected to diffuse reflection processing (concavo-convex processing) that reflects light in multiple directions.
The reflector 254 is an inverted truncated cone-shaped member whose upper surface and lower surface are open, and is engaged with the inner upper lens 256 in the button while being arranged in the lower lens 255 in the button. The surface of the reflector 254 is subjected to a reflection process that reflects light.

Inside the base main body portion 252a of the button lower base 252, an LED board 252d on which a plurality of (nine in the case of this embodiment) LEDs are mounted is mounted. One of the LEDs mounted on the LED substrate 252d is arranged at a position within the lower surface opening 254a of the reflector 254, and the remaining LEDs are located at a position within the central opening 253a of the reflector base 253. It is arranged at a position surrounding the lower surface opening 254a of the reflector 254.
Of the LEDs mounted on the LED substrate 252d, some of the light from the LEDs arranged at the position within the lower surface opening 254a of the reflector 254 is directly incident on the upper lens 256 in the button, and the rest. The light is reflected by the reflector 254 and incident on the upper lens 256 in the button.
Further, among the LEDs mounted on the LED substrate 252d, the light from the LEDs arranged at the positions surrounding the lower surface opening 254a of the reflector 254 is reflected by the reflector 254 and the upper surface of the reflector base 253 (diffuse reflection processing is applied). It is incident on the surface), is reflected on the upper surface, and is incident on the in-button lenses 255 and 256.

The lower lens 255 inside the button is a member capable of transmitting light, and is engaged with the reflector base 253 in a state of being disposed in the reflector base 253.
The inner upper lens 256 of the button is a member capable of transmitting light, and is engaged with the lower lens 255 inside the button.
The button lens decoration 257 is a member capable of transmitting light, and is sandwiched between the button bottom base 252 and the button lens 258. On the upper surface of the button lens decoration 257, characters (characters "PUSH" in the case of this embodiment) and patterns due to unevenness are provided.
The button lens 258 is a transparent member capable of transmitting light, and is engaged with the button lower base 252 from above the button lens decoration 257.
The button frame 259 is a member arranged around the button lens 258 and engages with the button unit base 251 from above the button lens 258.

As described above, the in-button lens 255, 256, the button lens decoration 257, and the button lens 258 are members capable of transmitting light. Therefore, the light from the LED substrate 252d (that is, the light incident on the in-button lenses 255 and 256) passes through the in-button lenses 255 and 256, the button lens decoration 257, and the button lens 258, and is transmitted to the outside of the effect button 25. Is released to.
Further, since the button lens 258 is a transparent member, characters and patterns due to the unevenness provided on the upper surface of the button lens decoration 257 can be visually recognized from the outside of the effect button 25 through the button lens 258.

FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the unit main body portion 260.
For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the unit main body portion 260 includes an upper plate base 261, a button fixing member 262 attached to the lower surface side of the upper plate base 261 and an upper plate attached to the front side of the upper plate base 261. The frame 263, the operation panel 264 mounted on the upper surface side of the upper plate frame 263, the button base 265 mounted on the lower surface side of the upper plate frame 263, and the light emitting decorative member 266a mounted on the upper plate frame 263. It is configured to include a light emitting main body member 266b mounted on the upper plate frame 263 corresponding to the light emitting decorative member 266a.

The upper plate base 261 is a member that forms the upper plate 21. Further, the upper plate base 261 is formed with a mobile terminal placing portion 28, and a lower speaker 19b on the left side is attached.
The button fixing member 262 is a member for fixing the lending button 27a, the return button 27b, and the balance display 27c at a predetermined position on the operation panel 264.
The upper plate frame 263 is a member arranged along the front edge of the upper plate 21. Upright walls 263a that stand up upward are provided at the left front end and the right front end of the upper plate frame 263, respectively. The upright wall 263a is provided with a plurality of (six in the case of the present embodiment) through holes 263a1.

The light emitting decorative member 266a is a member mounted on the front side of the upright wall 263a of the upper plate frame 263, and is for fixing the upper plate lens capable of transmitting light and the upper plate lens at a predetermined position on the upright wall 263a. It is configured with a lens frame of.
The light emitting main body member 266b is a member mounted on the rear surface side of the upright wall 263a of the upper plate frame 263, and includes an LED substrate and a cover for fixing the LED substrate at a predetermined position of the upright wall 263a. Will be done. The light emitting main body member 266b includes a plurality of (six in the case of the present embodiment) LEDs, and each LED corresponds to each through hole 263a1 of the upright wall 263a in a ratio of 1: 1. That is, the light from the LED of the light emitting main body member 266b enters the upper plate lens of the light emitting decorative member 266a through the through hole 263a1 corresponding to the LED, passes through the upper plate lens, and is transmitted to the outside of the unit main body portion 260. Is released to.

The operation panel 264 is a member arranged around the effect button 25. A lending button 27a, a return button 27b, and a balance display 27c are mounted on the upper surface side of the right side of the operation panel 264, and a lending button 27a, a return button 27b, and a balance display are mounted on the lower surface side of the right side of the operation panel 264. A substrate (not shown) relating to the vessel 27c is mounted. A volume adjustment button 27e and a cross key 29 are mounted on the upper left side of the operation panel 264, and a substrate relating to the volume adjustment button 27e and the cross key 29 is mounted on the lower left side of the operation panel 264. (Not shown) is installed.
At least the upper surface of the operation panel 264 is capable of reflecting light. Specifically, for example, the surface of the operation panel 264 is a glossy surface. Therefore, since the light emitted from the effect button 25 can be reflected by the operation panel 264, the effect of the effect button 25 can be enhanced.
The button base 265 is a member arranged below the effect button 25, and includes a support member 260b that supports the effect button 25. An upper plate operation lever 27d and a reinforcing plate 265a for supporting the operation panel 264 are mounted on the upper surface side of the button base 265.

The upper plate unit 153 is provided with a water storage mechanism for storing the liquid when the effect button 25 is splashed with the liquid due to a spill of a beverage possessed by the player.
As described above, the upper plate unit 153 is installed in the lower part of the glass frame 15 and is configured as a protruding unit projecting forward of the game machine 10. Therefore, if a player spills a beverage or the like possessed by the player, there is a high possibility that the upper plate unit 153 will be spilled. The upper plate unit 153 is provided with an effect button 25, and when the effect button 25 is splashed with liquid and the effect button 25 breaks down, the effect using the effect button 25 (the effect of causing the effect button 25 to emit light). There is a problem that the effect of vibrating the button 25, the effect of intervening the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, etc.) cannot be executed, and the interest of the game is lowered. As a countermeasure against such a problem, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a water storage mechanism capable of guiding the liquid to a relatively safe place and storing the liquid when the effect button 25 is splashed with the liquid. There is.

Here, the relatively safe place is a space in the upper plate unit 153 that is less likely to affect various electric parts in the upper plate unit 153 even if liquid is stored. The water storage mechanism of the present embodiment is a mechanism for storing a liquid inside the upper plate unit 153. On the other hand, inside the precision plate unit 153, the vibration motor 251a in the effect button 25, the LED board 252d, the effect button switch 25a, the LED board of the light emitting main body member 266b, the board related to the volume adjustment button 27e and the cross key 29, and these. Various electric components such as a relay board 153a for relaying the effect control device 300, a board for a lending button 27a, a return button 27b, and a balance indicator 27c are arranged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the spaces in the upper plate unit 153, the space that does not easily affect these electric components even if the liquid is stored is used as the water storage unit of the water storage mechanism.
The relay board 153a is an electric component arranged inside the precision plate unit 153 that is connected to the effect control device 300 (vibration motor 251a, LED board 252d, effect button switch 25a, LED board of the light emitting main body member 266b, etc. It is connected to the volume adjusting button 27e and the board related to the cross key 29) via the connector 153a1. In this way, the wiring space can be reduced by collecting the devices connected to the effect control device 300. The relay board 153a is attached to the rear end portion of the button base 265, for example, as shown in FIG. That is, the relay board 153a is behind the water storage units (front side water storage units 267a, 267b (described later), left side water storage units 268a, 268b (described later), right side water storage units 269a, 269b (described later)) (upper plate base 261 side). ) Is attached.
Even if the relay board 153a is connected not only to the effect control device 300 but also to a device other than the effect control device 300 (such as a board related to the lending button 27a, the return button 27b, and the balance indicator 27c). good. This makes it possible to further reduce the wiring space.

FIG. 18A is a front view (front view) of the effect button 25 with the button frame 259 removed, and FIG. 18B is a perspective view of the effect button 25 with the button frame 259 removed. FIG. 18C is a plan view (top view) of the effect button 25 in a state where the button frame 259 is removed.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 18 (a) to 18 (c), the button lower base 252 has a front guide recess 252e, a left guide recess 252f, and a right guide recess 252 g on the outer surface of the base main body 252a. ing. Further, the button lens 258 has a groove portion 258b along the outer circumference of the dome-shaped lens main body portion 258a. Therefore, the liquid applied to the effect button 25 moves along the surface of the lens body portion 258a to the groove portion 258b.

The liquid in the groove 258b moves along the groove 258b to the guide recesses 252e, 252f, 252g. That is, the groove portion 258b is a guide path for guiding the liquid to the guide recesses 252e, 252f, and 252 g. The effect button 25 is installed in a state of being tilted toward the front side of the game machine 10. Therefore, the liquid in the groove portion 258b (the groove portion 258b on the front side of the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 18C) on the front side of the left side guide recess 252f and the right side guide recess 252g is guided to the front guide recess 252e by the groove portion 258b. Will be done. Further, the liquid in the groove portion 258b (the groove portion 258b behind the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 18 (c)) behind the left guide recess 252f and the right guide recess 252g is collected by the groove portion 258b from the left guide recess 252f. Alternatively, it is guided to the right side guide recess 252 g.

19 (a) is a front view of the upper plate unit 153, FIG. 19 (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19 (a), and FIG. 19 (c) is FIG. 19 (b). ) Is an enlarged view of the main part.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 19 (b) and 19 (c), the upper plate frame 263 has a front guide step portion 263b at the front end portion. The liquid that has moved to the front guide recess 252e of the effect button 25 is guided to the front guide step portion 263b of the upper plate frame 263 by the front guide recess 252e. That is, the front guide recess 252e is a guide port for guiding the liquid to the front guide step portion 263b. Specifically, the liquid that has moved to the front guide recess 252e moves from the upper end of the front guide recess 252e to the front end of the front guide recess 252e (the tip of the upper surface of the bottom of the front guide recess 252e), and from the front end. It falls to the front guide step portion 263b.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C, a plurality of (three in the case of this embodiment) ribs 252e1 are provided in the front guide recess 252e. As shown in FIG. 19C, for example, the front surface of the rib 252e1 has an inclined surface so as to be substantially orthogonal to the horizontal plane when the effect button 25 is normally installed (inclined toward the front side of the game machine 10). It has become. Therefore, the liquid that has moved to the front guide recess 252e can move from the upper end of the front guide recess 252e to the front end of the front guide recess 252e in the shortest distance along the front surface of the rib 252e1, and thus the front side of the front guide recess 252e. The liquid can be smoothly guided to the guide step portion 263b.

The liquid that has moved to the front guide step portion 263b is guided by the front guide step portion 263b to the space (first front water storage portion 267a) formed between the upper plate frame 263 and the operation panel 264, and the first 1 Accumulates in the front water storage section 267a. When the water storage amount of the first front water storage unit 267a reaches the upper limit, the liquid is formed from the first front water storage unit 267a between the upper plate frame 263 and the button base 265 (second). It moves to the front water storage section 267b) and accumulates in the second front water storage section 267b).
That is, first, the liquid flows into the first front water storage unit 267a, and after the water storage amount of the first front water storage unit 267a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second front water storage unit 267b. Therefore, the first front water storage unit 267a can delay the inflow of the liquid into the second front water storage unit 267b (the flow of the liquid to the effect button 25 side).

For example, as shown in FIG. 19C, when the effect button 25 is normally installed, the front end of the front guide recess 252e (the tip of the upper surface of the bottom of the front guide recess 252e) is from the upper end of the front guide step portion 263b. Is also located on the front side and is located on the rear side of the front end of the front guide step portion 263b. As a result, the liquid falling from the front end of the front guide recess 252e can be reliably flowed into the front guide step portion 263b. That is, since the liquid falling from the front end of the front guide recess 252e does not directly flow into the second front water storage unit 267b, the liquid flows into the second front water storage unit 267b (the liquid on the effect button 25 side). The flow) can be reliably delayed.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 19C, in a state where the effect button 25 is normally installed, the bottom lower surface 252e2 of the front guide recess 252e is inclined upward to the proximal end side (rear side). As a result, the liquid in the front guide recess 252e can be reliably dropped from the front end of the front guide recess 252e. That is, since the liquid in the front guide recess 252e does not directly flow into the second front water storage section 267b through the bottom lower surface 252e2, the liquid flows into the second front water storage section 267b (to the effect button 25 side). The flow of liquid) can be reliably delayed.

20 (a) is a plan view of the precision plate unit 153, FIG. 20 (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 20 (a), and FIG. 20 (c) is FIG. 20 (b). ) Is an enlarged view of the main part. 21 (a) is a plan view of the button base 265 with the reinforcing plate 265a attached, and FIG. 21 (b) is a plan view of the button base 265 with the reinforcing plate 265a not attached. is there.
In addition to the front water storage units 267a and 267b, the precision plate unit 153 has left side water storage units 268a and 268b and the right side as a space that does not easily affect various electric components even if liquid is stored, that is, a space used as a water storage unit of the water storage mechanism. It is provided with water storage units 269a and 269b. The left water storage portions 268a and 268b and the right water storage portions 269a and 269b are provided in the button base 265.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20 (c), among the spaces in the button base 265, the space located below the left reinforcing plate 265a is the first left water storage portion 268a. The space located below the reinforcing plate 265a on the right side is the first right water storage portion 269a. That is, the portions with lattice hatching in FIG. 21B are the first left water storage unit 268a and the first right side water storage unit 269a.
Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20 (c), among the spaces in the button base 265, the space adjacent to the first left water storage unit 268a and located on the right side of the first left water storage unit 268a. The space (the space located below the effect button 25) is the second left water storage unit 268b, which is a space adjacent to the first right side water storage unit 269a and located on the left side of the first right side water storage unit 269a (space). The space below the effect button 25) is the second right water storage unit 269b. That is, the portions with lattice hatching in FIG. 21A are the second left water storage section 268b and the second right water storage section 269b.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20 (c), the operation panel 264 has a left guide step portion 264a and a right guide step portion 264b at the edge of the opening 260a. The liquid that has moved to the left side guide recess 252f of the effect button 25 is guided to the left side guide step portion 264a of the operation panel 264 by the left side guide recess 252f. That is, the left side guide recess 252f is a guide port for guiding the liquid to the left side guide step portion 264a. Further, the liquid that has moved to the right side guide recess 252 g of the effect button 25 is guided to the right side guide step portion 264b of the operation panel 264 by the right side guide recess 252 g. That is, the right side guide recess 252 g is a guide port for guiding the liquid to the right side guide step portion 264b.

The liquid that has moved to the left guide step portion 264a of the operation panel 264 is guided to the first left water storage section 268a by the left guide step section 264a and the left reinforcing plate 265a and accumulates in the first left water storage section 268a. .. Then, when the water storage amount of the first left water storage unit 268a reaches the upper limit, the liquid moves from the first left water storage unit 268a to the second left water storage unit 268b and enters the second left water storage unit 268b. Accumulate.
That is, first, the liquid flows into the first left water storage unit 268a, and after the water storage amount of the first left water storage unit 268a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second left water storage unit 268b. Therefore, the first left water storage unit 268a can delay the inflow of the liquid into the second left water storage unit 268b (the flow of the liquid to the effect button 25 side).

Further, the liquid that has moved to the right guide step portion 264b of the operation panel 264 is guided to the first right water storage section 269a by the right guide step portion 264b and the right reinforcing plate 265a, and is inside the first right water storage section 269a. Accumulate. Then, when the water storage amount of the first right-side water storage unit 269a reaches the upper limit, the liquid moves from the first right-side water storage unit 269a to the second right-side water storage unit 269b and enters the second right-side water storage unit 269b. Accumulate.
That is, first, the liquid flows into the first right-side water storage unit 269a, and after the water storage amount of the first right-side water storage unit 269a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second right-side water storage unit 269b. Therefore, the first right water storage unit 269a can delay the inflow of the liquid into the second right water storage unit 269b (the flow of the liquid to the effect button 25 side).
Further, since the button base 265 is tilted forward (see FIG. 19B), when the water storage amount of the second left water storage unit 268b or the second right side water storage unit 269b reaches the upper limit, the liquid is released. It moves from the second left water storage section 268b and the second right water storage section 269b to the second front water storage section 267b and accumulates in the second front water storage section 267b.

The liquid accumulated in the water storage section of the water storage mechanism (front water storage section 267a, 267b, left water storage section 268a, 268b, right water storage section 269a, 269b) evaporates naturally. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, since various electric parts are provided in the upper plate unit 153, the evaporation of the liquid in the water storage unit can be promoted by the heat from these parts.
A drainage port may be provided so that the liquid in the water storage unit can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 10. Since the lower plate 23 is arranged at the lower left of the upper plate unit 153, the drain port is the upper plate from the viewpoint of preventing the liquid discharged from the drain port from flowing into the lower plate 23. It is preferably provided on the right side of the unit 153. Further, the drainage port may be provided with an opening / closing member that opens and closes the drainage port according to an operation by a player or the like.

In the water storage mechanism configured as described above, the effect button 25 is formed by the groove portion 258b provided in the button lens 258 of the effect button 25 and the guide recesses 252e, 252f, 252 g provided in the button bottom base 252 of the effect button 25. The applied liquid can be guided to a relatively safe place in the upper plate unit 153 without entering the inside of the effect button 25 (the inside of the button unit base 251 to the button lens 258). Therefore, even if the effect button 25 is splashed with liquid, the effect button 25 is unlikely to break down. Therefore, the effect using the effect button 25 (the effect of causing the effect button 25 to emit light, the effect of vibrating the effect button 25, and the effect button 25 by the player). It is possible to reduce the occurrence of inconvenience that makes it impossible to execute (such as the effect of intervening the operation of).

Further, a relatively safe place in the upper plate unit 153 is located in the second water storage section (second front water storage section 267b, second left water storage section 268b, second right water storage section 269b) and the second water storage section. The liquid guided into the upper plate unit 153 is divided into the first water storage unit (first front side water storage unit 267a, first left side water storage unit 268a, first right side water storage unit 269a) located far from the effect button 25. First, it can be stored in the first water storage section, and after the water storage amount of the first water storage section reaches the upper limit, it can be stored in the second water storage section. That is, the first water storage unit can delay the inflow (flow) of a predetermined amount (for example, the maximum water storage amount of the first water storage unit) into the second water storage unit. In this way, by delaying the inflow of the liquid into the second water storage unit (the flow of the liquid to the effect button 25 side) by the first water storage unit, the inconvenience that the effect using the effect button 25 cannot be executed occurs. It is possible to reduce it reliably.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19B, an effect button switch 25a is arranged above the second front water storage unit 267b. Therefore, when the water storage amount of the second front water storage unit 267b reaches the upper limit, the effect button switch 25a may come into contact with the liquid and break down. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (c), a vibration motor 251a is arranged above the second left water storage unit 268b and the second right water storage unit 269b. Therefore, when the amount of water stored in the second left water storage unit 268b or the second right water storage unit 269b reaches the upper limit, the vibration motor 251a may come into contact with the liquid and break down.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inflow of the liquid into the second water storage unit can be delayed by the first water storage unit. Therefore, during the delay, it is possible to take measures such as wiping off the liquid on the effect button 25 so that the amount of water stored in the second water storage unit does not reach the upper limit, so that the effect button switch 25a fails. It is possible to reliably reduce the occurrence of inconveniences such as the effect that the player intervenes in the operation of the effect button 25 cannot be executed, and the effect that the vibration motor 251a breaks down and the effect button 25 is vibrated cannot be executed. It becomes.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game machine provided with the operation means (upper plate unit 153) having the operation unit (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player, the operation to the operation unit can be performed. A predetermined effect (for example, a look-ahead effect described later) can be executed accordingly, and the operating means is a substrate (for example, LED substrate 252d) provided inside the operation unit and an induction for guiding a fluid (for example, a liquid). It is configured to include means (groove portion 258b, induction recesses 252e, 252f, 252g) and delay means (first water storage portions 267a, 268a, 269a) for delaying the flow of the fluid induced by the induction means. (See FIGS. 19 and 20). Specifically, the guiding means guides the fluid to the delaying means, and the delaying means delays the flow of the fluid to the inside of the operating unit (ie, the second water storage units 267b, 268b, 269b).
Therefore, even if a fluid (for example, a liquid) is applied to the operation unit (effect button 25), the operation unit is less likely to break down, so that the inconvenience of not being able to perform the effect using the operation unit is unlikely to occur. , The interest is hard to decline.

22 (a) is a right side view of the front frame unit 15a, and is a view for explaining the viewing window portion 15c, and FIG. 22 (b) is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG. 22 (a). Is. FIG. 23A is a rear perspective view of the front frame unit 15a for explaining the viewing window portion 15c, and FIG. 23B is an enlargement of the main part in FIG. 23A. It is a figure.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, when the glass frame 15 is opened with the front frame 12 closed, the viewing window portion 15c (between the front frame main body portion 151 and the upper plate unit 153). The inside of the upper plate unit 153 can be visually recognized from the outside of the glass frame 15 through the gap). Since the viewing window portion 15c is provided on the open end (right end) side of the glass frame 15, the right side region inside the upper plate unit 153 is particularly easy to see through the viewing window portion 15c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the upper plate operating lever 27d, which is operated to allow the game ball in the upper plate 21 to flow down to the lower plate 23, is provided on the right side of the button base 265. Therefore, the portion of the upper plate operating lever 27d that is disposed inside the upper plate unit 153 (hereinafter referred to as "base end portion of the upper plate operating lever 27d") is located in the right side region inside the upper plate unit 153. Since it is located, it can be visually recognized through the viewing window portion 15c, for example, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B. That is, the operation of the upper plate operating lever 27d can be visually confirmed through the viewing window portion 15c.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 17, one of the two light emitting main body members 266b is attached to the upright wall 263a on the right side of the upper plate frame 263. Therefore, since the one light emitting main body member 266b (right light emitting main body member 266b) is located in the right side region inside the precision plate unit 153, for example, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). , It can be visually recognized through the viewing window portion 15c. Further, when the light emitting main body member 266b on the right side emits light, the inside of the upper plate unit 153 (particularly, the right region inside the upper plate unit 153) is brightly illuminated by the light leaking from the light emitting main body member 266b. Therefore, it becomes easier to visually check the inside of the upper plate unit 153 (for example, visually confirm the operation of the upper plate operation lever 27d) via the visual recognition window portion 15c.
Further, when the light emitting main body member 266b on the right side is emitting light, the light emitting mode can be visually confirmed from the visual recognition window portion 15c, so that it is currently generated even if the glass frame 15 is not closed and confirmed. It is possible to recognize existing errors. Specifically, for example, when the light emitting mode corresponding to the door opening error is red and the light emitting mode corresponding to the payout error is green, is the light emitting main body member 266b on the right side emitting light in red? That is, it is confirmed from the visual window portion 15c whether only the door opening error has occurred) or whether the light is emitted in yellow (= red + green) (that is, whether the door opening error and the payout error have occurred). Therefore, it is possible to recognize the error currently occurring without closing and checking the glass frame 15.

FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the front frame unit 15a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 6A, 6B and 24, the front frame unit 15a is attached to the front frame main body 151 and the upper left and upper right portions on the front side of the front frame main body 151, respectively. Speaker decoration 152, an upper plate unit 153 attached to the lower part on the front side of the front frame main body 151, and a front frame light emitting unit attached to each of the left and right parts on the front side of the front frame main body 151. It is configured to include 154 and a cover member 155 attached to each of the upper left portion and the upper right portion on the rear surface side of the front frame main body portion 151. The front frame light emitting unit 154 is a kind of frame decoration device 18.

FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the right side. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the LED substrate 181 and the reflector 183 and the inner lens 184 in the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the right side. Since the configuration of the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the left side and the configuration of the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the right side are substantially the same, here, the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the right side is referred to with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The description of the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the left side will be omitted.
For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the right side is arranged in front of the LED substrate 181 and the LED substrate 181 to be fastened to the front frame main body 151 and fastened to the front frame main body 151. A transparent back cover 182, a reflector 183 and an inner lens 184 arranged in front of the back cover 182 and fixed to the back cover 182, and an inner lens 184 arranged to the right of the inner lens 184 and stopped at the inner lens 184. The side cover 185 to be worn and the outer lens 186 arranged on the left side of the inner lens 184 and fastened to the side cover 185 are provided. The outer lens 186 is engaged with the reflector 183 while covering the reflector 183 and the inner lens 184. Further, the inner lens 184 and the outer lens 186 are fixed at the same position on the side cover 185.

Of the plurality of LEDs provided on the LED substrate 181, some LEDs (LEDs in the area surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 25) are LEDs for the reflector 183, and the remaining LEDs are LEDs for the inner lens 184. ..
For example, as shown in FIG. 26, the reflector 183 is provided with a plurality of (11 in the case of the present embodiment) through holes 183a, and the LED for the reflector 183 provided on the LED substrate 181 (in the present embodiment). In this case, each of the eight LEDs) corresponds 1: 1 to each of the partial through holes 183a (in the case of this embodiment, the eight through holes 183a) provided in the reflector 183. Therefore, since the LED for the reflector 183 is exposed through the through hole 183a corresponding to the LED, some of the light from the LED for the reflector 183 is directly incident on the outer lens 186.

Further, of the light from the LED for the reflector 183, the remaining light (light that does not directly enter the outer lens 186) reflects the front surface of the reflector 183 (a surface that has been subjected to a reflection process that reflects light) and is an outer lens. It is incident on 186.
Since the outer lens 186 is a transparent member, the light from the LED for the reflector 183 incident on the outer lens 186 is transmitted through the outer lens 186 and emitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154. In this way, the reflector 183 can irradiate the direct light from the LED for the reflector 183 and the indirect light (reflected light) from the reflector 183 toward the player side, so that more effective light emission effect can be achieved. Can be done.
Further, since the LED for the reflector 183 is exposed through the through hole 183a of the reflector 183, it can be visually recognized from the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 through the transparent outer lens 186.

On the other hand, the LED for the inner lens 184 provided on the LED substrate 181 is covered with an inner lens 184 (member shown by a broken line in FIG. 26) capable of transmitting light. Therefore, the light from the LED for the inner lens 184 passes through the inner lens 184 and enters the outer lens 186, passes through the outer lens 186, and is emitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154.
Further, the inner lens 184 is a semi-transparent member capable of transmitting light but having low transparency. Therefore, since it is blocked by the inner lens 184, the LED for the inner lens 184 cannot be visually recognized from the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 through the transparent outer lens 186.

For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the side cover 185 is provided with a plurality of (five in the case of the present embodiment) openings, each of which is covered with a translucent inner cover 185a. Therefore, the light transmitted through the inner lens 184 (light from the LED for the inner lens 184) also enters the inner cover 185a, passes through the inner cover 185a, and is emitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154. The inner cover 185a is a translucent member capable of transmitting light but having low transparency. Therefore, the inside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 cannot be visually recognized through the inner cover 185a.

<Sphere flow path unit>
FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 11 as viewed from the rear surface side.
For example, as shown in FIG. 27, on the rear surface side of the outer frame 11, a launching board 240a for controlling the ball launching device 240, a ball flow path unit 220, a payout board (payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31)), and A board unit 11a having a power supply board (power supply device 400 (see FIG. 31)) is arranged.

FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the spherical flow path unit 220.
For example, as shown in FIG. 28, the ball flow path unit 220 includes a ball flow path unit base 221, a front lid member 222 mounted on the front surface side of the ball flow path unit base 221 and a rear surface of the ball flow path unit base 221. It is configured to include a rear lid member 223 mounted on the side. On the front side of the ball flow path unit base 221, an out-ball detection switch 32a (see FIG. 31) that detects all game balls (safe balls and out-balls) that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game is attached. ing.

29 (a) is a rear view (rear view) of the ball flow path unit base 221 and FIG. 29 (b) is a front view (front view) of the front lid member 222, which is a front lid member 222. It is a figure when it is made transparent.
The game ball paid out from the payout unit flows into the ball flow path unit 220 from the inflow port 221e (see FIG. 28) provided on the rear surface side of the ball flow path unit base 221 and passes through the ball flow path unit base 221. It is discharged to the outside of the ball flow path unit 220 from the outflow port 221c (see FIG. 28) penetrating in the front-rear direction. The discharged game ball is supplied to the upper plate 21.
On the other hand, when the upper plate 21 is full, the game ball flowing into the ball flow path unit 220 from the inflow port 221e is a payout ball flow provided between the ball flow path unit base 221 and the rear lid member 223. It flows down the path and is discharged to the outside of the ball flow path unit 220. The discharged game ball is supplied to the lower plate 23. For example, as shown in FIG. 29A, a payout ball flow path forming rib 221a forming the payout ball flow path is projected from the rear surface of the ball flow path unit base 221. An overflow sensor 221b for detecting that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (filled up) in the lower plate 23 is arranged in the downstream portion of the payout ball flow path. The overflow sensor 221b is, for example, a pressure sensor that detects the pressure from the game ball, and is attached to the rear surface side of the ball flow path unit base 221 as shown in FIG. 29 (a), for example. The arrow in FIG. 29A is an arrow indicating the flow direction of the game ball paid out from the payout unit (that is, the guiding direction of the game ball by the payout ball flow path).

All the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game are ball flow path units from the ball flow path unit 221d (see FIG. 28) provided on the front side of the ball flow path unit base 221. It flows into the ball flow path 220, flows down the out ball flow path provided between the ball flow path unit base 221 and the front lid member 222, and is discharged to the outside of the ball flow path unit 220. The discharged game ball is discharged from the game machine 10 to the island facility side. For example, as shown in FIG. 29B, an out-ball flow path forming rib 222a for forming the out-ball flow path is provided on the rear surface of the front lid member 222.
An out-ball detection switch 32a is arranged in the middle of the out-ball flow path, and the out-ball detection switch 32a is configured to detect one game ball passing through the out-ball flow path. .. The arrow in FIG. 29B indicates the flow direction of all the game balls (safe ball and out ball) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game (that is, the direction in which the game ball is guided by the out ball flow path). It is an arrow indicating.

The out ball detection switch 32a is not a sensor that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, but the out ball (out port 30a provided in the game area 32). It may be a sensor that detects a game ball) that has flowed into (see FIG. 30). That is, the safe ball (the game ball that has won the prize in the winning area) may not flow into the ball receiving port 221d of the ball flow path unit 220, and only the out ball may flow into the ball receiving port 221d.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 30, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to launch a game ball from the hit ball launching device 240 into the game area 32 surrounded by the outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. For example, a character or a character that produces a plurality of identification information (special symbols) or a special figure variation display game. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the starting winning opening 36 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 30 toward the center of the display device 41.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 31) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 31).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 31).
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (not shown), and the movable member always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the game ball is easily flowed into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 31) as a driving device (game). It can be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person.

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by advancing and retreating (sliding) in the front-rear direction by the normal variable winning device 37c. The movable member of 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side by the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, or the ordinary electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted "C" shape.
Further, the normal variable winning device 37 enables the winning of the game ball even when the movable member is closed, and the game ball may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, the game ball is not accepted or easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper large winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving back and forth (sliding) the opening / closing member (not shown). The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 31).

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), a specific area where game balls can flow in is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 31) is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game balls into the specific area. ) Is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 31) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous for the player can be obtained. It occurs (in this embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper prize opening, a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 31) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 38a provided inside the upper large winning opening (the number of game balls flowing into the upper large winning opening), and detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e. By matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize opening have been discharged, and basically until this confirmation is completed. Is not open to the new top prize opening.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a second special variable winning can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize opening) 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower large winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving (sliding) the opening / closing member (not shown) in the front-rear direction. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower large winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower large winning opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 31).

The game area 32 below the start winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like. Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 variable display for a special figure 1 variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A special figure 2 display (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 for a game, a first storage display unit 53 for notifying the start storage number of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game composed of an LED lamp, and an LED lamp. A second storage display unit 54 for notifying the start memory number of the configured special figure 2 variable display game is provided.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying a hitting method (a hitting method corresponding to a game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of a special figure variation display game are provided. There is. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, a normal map display unit 58 for displaying the normal map fluctuation display game, a storage display unit 59 for notifying the start memory number of the normal map fluctuation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is in the center, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven. It is configured so that it is displayed that it is changing and it is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The first storage display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. , Lights (blinks) to display.
The second storage display unit 54 sets the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, of the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off and on (blinking).
The round display unit 55 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the case of a game state in which left-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than right-handed hitting (normal hitting), all the LEDs are turned off and left. When right-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the probability state of the jackpot is a low probability state (normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and the probability state of the jackpot is a high probability state (probability change state). In the case of, all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply unit having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. It has a 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. It includes a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to remove the target from replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops below 17V, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variablely displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in the variation display without reach and reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and so on. The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and the gate switch in the general drawing start gate 34. 34a, the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e arranged in the first special variable winning device 38, and all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. An interface chip that is connected to the out-ball detection switch 32a to detect, receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. (Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the sensor and proximity switch are illegally shorted, the sensor and switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wires are cut and floated. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. Will be done. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on a front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, a detection signal of a vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10, and a game machine. The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of 10 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole for inserting the setting key, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position, and is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it turns off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values that give special results in the special figure variation display game are assigned, and operate these operation units. As a result, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values, "setting 1" to "setting 6", are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, turn on the power of the game machine while operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. Is set to the probability setting value change mode in which the probability setting value can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability setting value change mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability set value information while the operation related to the probability set value is being performed (during the probability set value change mode and the probability set value confirmation mode), and other than that. In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

In addition, by turning on the power of the game machine while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is the performance display device. It is displayed in 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set. The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124, 126 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 just before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b that opens the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large) that opens the second special variable winning device 39. The operation data of the winning port solenoid 2) 39b, the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38, and the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 are output and are currently selected. It is a port for outputting the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the stochastic set value.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. It is output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. The external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 to the external device such as the management device is sent to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d to output and a fifth driver 138e to generate and output a drive signal by receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 are provided. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32 V can be driven. DC5V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as the power supply voltage to the fifth driver 138e so that the performance display device 153 operating at 5V can be driven.
Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. Absent.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate. The switch 34a is provided with a magnetic detection coil, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used. Has been done. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 32.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 are a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. Wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having an LED (light emitting diode) (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, and an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting such as and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting a state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

FIG. 33 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

The jackpot probability value (probability value), which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are respectively. The probability value is as shown in FIG. 33 (a).
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, the same probability value is assigned as the probability value in the high probability state to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6", but different probabilities. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, the same probability value is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2" as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. It may be assigned. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6". That is, the probability value in the low probability state is not limited as long as it can be switched in multiple stages. Further, the same probability value may be assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

Further, the effect distribution and the like may be different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" having the same probability value in the assigned low probability state. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6".
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, there are six probability setting values (“setting 1”) for three types of probability values (probability value in the low probability state and probability value in the high probability state). "~" Setting 6 ") is assigned, but for example, three probability setting values (for example," setting 1 "to" setting 3 ") are assigned to three types of probability values, and the remaining three probability setting values (for example) are assigned. "Setting 4" to "Setting 6") may be omitted.

In the game machine of the present embodiment, in the special game state based on the big hit (first special game state), the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d. By being performed (passing V), the high probability state is set after the end of the special game state, and the low probability state is set when the fall lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed is won. The probability of winning the fall lottery is as shown in FIG. 33 (b).
Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 33 (c). This small hit probability is higher in Special Figure 2 than in Special Figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not won in duplicate. In the present embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but is provided only in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but the small hit is not limited to this, for example. May be provided in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. Further, when the small hit is provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 is better than the special figure 1. May be higher, and special figure 1 may be higher than special figure 2.

Further, FIG. 33 (d) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
There are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game: 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. Similarly, there are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and is likely to become a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. , It shows that the possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area) is low and it is difficult to reach the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds for which opening control is performed so that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the number of actual rounds + the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the opening control is performed so that the winning ball does not actually occur). You may.

In addition, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is lower than that of the probabilistic jackpot, but the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is higher than that of the normal jackpot.
Further, in the game machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area). If the game ball does not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c) show the opening mode in each round for each jackpot type. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG. 35.
As shown in FIG. 34 (a), in the 10R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variation operation region) is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed. The long opening with V is an opening mode in which the game ball is likely to flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region). Then, from the second round onward, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and a long opening without V is performed.
As shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the 4R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed. Then, from the 2nd round to the 4th round, the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. A long opening without V is performed, and after the 5th round, the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened. Does not open a specific area. Short-open without V. The short opening without V is an opening mode in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the winning opening is lower than the long opening without V. That is, the long opening without V is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning ball is actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the 10R normal jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variation operating region) is opened in the first round, and a short opening with V is performed. The short opening with V is an opening mode in which the game ball may flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region) and is lower than the long opening with V. Then, from the second round onward, a long opening without V is performed to open the first special variable winning device 38.
The game ball can flow into the specific area (probability change operation area) only in the long opening with V and the short opening with V performed in the first round. That is, in the game machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which the game ball may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the specific round may be performed a plurality of times, such as the first round and the fifth round.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the long opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25,000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). ), When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t12), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t13), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t14). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 35 (b), in the long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on with the start of the round, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers a specific area and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can flow in. It becomes. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, the game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable prize device 38 is opened may flow into a specific area.

200 msec from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, when 2700 msec elapses, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t35), either the openable time of 25000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins. When the conditions are met, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t39), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t41), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t42). .. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). In addition, the specific area switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is for a sufficiently long time, and the lever solenoid 38f remains ON for a long time, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into the specific area. Become. Therefore, when the jackpot type is probabilistic, it will almost certainly be in a high probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 just before closing. It is possible for the game balls that have been played to flow into a specific area. The first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed as the remaining ball of the upper prize opening. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41), and the specific area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 have the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period (t43) when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and operates when the discharge is completed. Is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 have the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If all of the lever solenoid 38f is not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) is completed. The lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 35 (c), in the short opening with V, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. The round ends based on (t54). Since the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a short time, it is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the specific region. Therefore, it is rare that a high probability state occurs when the jackpot type is normal.

The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the activation / invalidation of the specific area switch 38d are the same as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 ( t55-t63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time of the remaining ball of the upper prize opening has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. The operation is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62). The specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62) after the operation is terminated in the state.

Further, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the long opening with V shown in FIG. 35 (b) and the first special variation in the short opening with V shown in FIG. 35 (c). The opening of the winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to an opening time such that at least one game ball can be won by the first special variable winning device 38.

As shown in FIG. 35 (d), in the V-less short opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t71) with the start of the round, and the openable time of 200 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). ), The first special variable winning device 38 is closed to end the round (t72) when any of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied. However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of prizes, which are the conditions for closing, occur, and in most cases, the game is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t72), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t73), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, FIG. 34 (d) shows an opening mode in the second special gaming state (special gaming state based on small hits). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time is started, and when the small hit fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, and the openable time of 1600 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example). The second special variable winning device 39 is closed when any of the conditions for winning the 9) game balls is satisfied. After that, the small hit remaining ball processing time is started, and when the small hit remaining ball processing time ends, the small hit ending time starts, and when the small hit ending time ends, the second special gaming state ends. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of opening / closing modes (opening time and number of opening times) in the second special game state, and in that case, for example, it is determined which opening / closing mode is set (adopted) based on the small hit symbol. ..

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a game state transition in the present embodiment.
The gaming state includes a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, and a second specific gaming state ST3. In addition to this, as special game states, there are a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the main in the game state. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variable special map, which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by hitting the left side, and aiming for a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37 by hitting the right side. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. In addition, each game state is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to proceed mainly with the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, the special figure probability is low, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game or normal Figure Fluctuation display There is no time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST1. ..

In the second specific game state ST3, the special figure probability is basically a low probability state. However, in the special game state based on the normal jackpot, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 (when V is passed), the probability is high. In addition, there is a general electric support that facilitates winning by improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable winning device 37. If there is Fuden support, it will be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is in a high probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure changing display game. There is a certain amount of time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is small hit RUSH. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the normal map fluctuation display game in the state with the normal power support (normal probability) is the same probability as the state without the normal power support (normal probability). In a state where there is a normal power support, the normal probability can be set to a higher probability (high probability state of the normal figure) than the normal probability (low probability state of the normal figure).
Further, in the present embodiment, the state without the normal electric support means that the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 is shorter than the state with the normal electric support. is there.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST1, and the normal variation winning device 37 is hit right. It is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at. The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game (in the case of this embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0), and the small hit is won more than the big hit. Since there is a high probability that the game will occur, small hits occur frequently in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state in which the normal electric support is provided continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the state without the normal electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit. Further, in the special gaming state based on the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 34 (d)).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable prizes. It wins the device 37 and does not flow down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, small hits occur frequently, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable prizes. Instead of winning the device 37, the game flows down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the player's game ball by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, small hits occur frequently and the number of balls held by the player increases. Therefore, the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

Of these three gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific gaming state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state ST1 because it has a general electric support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high-probability state, and further, the player's ball is increased due to the frequent occurrence of small hits. Therefore, the player has a higher probability than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. It is in an advantageous state.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, exhausting the specified number of games, and winning the fall lottery which is the transition lottery to the low probability state. .. Basically, the probability variation jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state, and in the first special gaming state, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 and the specific area switch. When it is detected in 38d (when V is passed), it shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 after the end of the first special gaming state. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot is derived and the first special gaming state is set, and the game ball does not flow into the specific area (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the first special gaming state (no V passage). In the case of), the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 occurs after the end of the first special gaming state. In addition, when a normal jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state and V is not passed in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure low probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. It shifts to the second specific game state ST3). On the other hand, when a normal jackpot is derived to enter the first special gaming state and there is a V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure high probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. It shifts to the second specific game state ST3).
Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (support count) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the fall lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). When the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game is performed by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from the hitting ball launching device 240 toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or the game area flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32. It is discharged from 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches a game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed) to move the starting winning opening 36 or the left side of the starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for a prize in the arranged general prize opening 35, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start memories is an upper limit number (for example, 4) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start memories is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in ROM 111B. The stored number of the normal figure start prizes is displayed on the normal figure hold display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory of starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time in the normal map display unit 58 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process of executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed. It should be noted that the normal drawing display unit 58 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the fluctuations for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. It may be configured.

When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern, which is a special result mode, is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display unit 58, and the normal variable winning device 37 is operated by operating the normal solenoid solenoid 37c. Control is performed to open the game for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control executing means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display unit 58 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition to storing, the second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory and the second start memory. Then, the stored number of the start memory is the first storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) and the second memory display unit 54 (special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50. Is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special drawing start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 display 52 (1st variation display device) is based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure variation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game of is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area). It serves as a first execution control means for controlling. Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area). It serves as a second execution control means for performing execution control.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). Then, it becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the hit probability is high and the general electric power is used). It is possible to control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed by (with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device 41. The display game is now running. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 changes the decoration identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It serves as a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is 0), but it is special in the normal gaming state. FIG. 2 Fluctuation display A long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left to aim at the start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game.
The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Further, the time of the long fluctuation may be different depending on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is off or a small hit, a long variation with a fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, a long variation with a variation time of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 39 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then at the start address of an area for saving values such as registers when an interrupt occurs. The stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instruction from the game control device 100 that serves as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is supplied. Wait for it to be blocked.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power failure are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when a power failure has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is given to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step). X11), output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer. A process (step X14) for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, the RAM error flag is set (step X15). Here, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM. It is determined whether the value of the area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), the RAM error flag is cleared (step X20) because there is no abnormality in the RAM, and the process proceeds to step X21.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), step. Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the effect control board (effect control) issues a main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal. It is transmitted to the device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the main abnormality error notification command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, if the power of the game machine is cut off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, so the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIG. 41 (h). After that, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

Further, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and speakers 19a and 19b. Notifies that the probability setting value is being changed by outputting the voice by.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (Tep X22; N and step X23). In N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is not in the ON state (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N), that is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step X41 and the power failure occurs. Performs processing when it recovers normally.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step X43; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

When the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command under confirmation of probability setting is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X37). The effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting confirmation, displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and speakers 19a and 19b. Notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed by outputting the voice by.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or longer, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process in the probability setting value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information editing of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. To. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, since it is necessary to output the security signal for at least 50 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), but the state read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) (current state). Judgment based on. When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and if no power failure has occurred (step X34; N), step X33 is performed. Return, and if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting changing flag is set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 37 and 38) after the power failure is restored. It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for disabling interrupts (step X38) is performed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec) from the process of enabling interrupts (step X32) to the process of disabling interrupts (steps X38 and X55). .. In the timer interrupt process, the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability set value, is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). The effect control device 300 ends the execution notification (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) based on receiving the notification end command. ..

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Performs a power failure recovery process (step X41) that saves an initial value at the time of power failure recovery in an area to be initialized (for example, a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring). The probability setting checking flag is cleared in this step X41.
After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold number commands, special figure 2 hold number commands, probability information commands, effect count information commands, screen designation commands, etc. Send a command. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being executed, if the customer is waiting. Send the command of the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted depending on the model.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1 byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, clear the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of the present embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a RAM initialization command (waiting for customers). Along with displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a production count information command and a support count information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with normal power support, are also transmitted.

Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the ordinary figure (win random number), random number that determines whether or not to win the fall lottery (fall lottery random number)) After saving in the predetermined area of (step X48), the interrupt is permitted (step X49). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing, which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or a random type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, since a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the normal figure is not provided, there is only one type of hit symbol of the normal figure, but a hit symbol random number is provided and the hit symbol of the normal figure is provided. May be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process in step X50, a process for disabling interrupts (step X51) is performed, and a performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process is performed. Return to (step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X50) (step X49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X50, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value in both of them In order to avoid executing the random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt, but as in the present embodiment. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. It has the advantage of being converted.

On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61). ), And then wait for the power of the game machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.
Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 39 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y), , The probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) is performed to end the timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are based on the output data set in various processes. , Lever solenoid 38f, Fuden solenoid 37c) and other actuators are subjected to output processing (step X105) for driving control and the like. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step X106), a random number update process 1 (step X107), and a random number update process 2 (step X108) are performed to output the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) is performed to open the frame and monitor errors such as illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39.

Next, it is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) in the first special variable winning device 38 is The number of game balls that have flowed into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a) is exceeded. If an abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. Then, when an abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the start port switch monitoring process (step X111) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37. Then, special figure 1 game processing (step X112) for performing processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 game processing (step X113) for performing processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and processing related to the normal figure variable display game are performed. Performs the normal map game process (step X114), and drives the segment LED provided on the game machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. The editing process (step X115) is performed.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and a process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. Radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) that checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine if there is any abnormality, and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Perform the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119). Further, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display monitor 153 are performed to end the timer interrupt processing. To do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 40 shows the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this probability setting change / confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X131).
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y), the probability setting corresponding to the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM (current probability setting value). The value display data is set (step X132), and the probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, in the performance display device 153, the display as shown in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (f) is performed.
On the other hand, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131; N), the extinguishing data is set as the probability setting value display data (step X133), and the probability setting value is displayed. The data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIG. 41 (g).

As shown in FIG. 41, the performance display device 153 is composed of four 7-segment displays (7-segment type display) arranged side by side. In the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the current probability setting value is shown on the rightmost 7-segment display among these four 7-segment displays, and the remaining 7-segment display shows "SET". "Is supposed to indicate the character.
Specifically, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the current probability setting value is "setting 1", so 7 at the right end as shown in FIG. 41 (a). When "1" is displayed on the seg display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "1", the current probability setting value is "setting 2", so FIG. 41 (b) shows. As shown, when "2" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "2", the current probability setting value is "setting 3". As shown in FIG. 41 (c), when "3" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "3", the current probability setting value is "set". Since it is "4", "4" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 41 (d), and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "4", it is the current value. Since the probability setting value is "setting 5", "5" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 41 (e), and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "5". In the case of, since the current probability setting value is “setting 6”, “6” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 41 (f). When the value in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the rightmost 7-segment display is turned off as shown in FIG. 41 (g).
For example, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and the third digit. The probability setting value display data instructing to display "E" and "S" in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (step X135). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X136). In step X136, on-data of the security signal is output regardless of whether or not the security signal control timer is timed up. Therefore, the security signal will continue to be output during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirmation flag is set).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Ends the probability setting change / confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process during execution is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139). In step X139, when an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected in the immediately preceding input process (step X103), it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y), that is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is 0 to 0. Update +1 in the range of 5 (step X140), and end the probability setting change / confirmation process. The value updated in step X140 (probability setting value after update) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change / confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” are used for three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). However, for example, "setting 1" to "setting 3" may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the region for the probability setting value of RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the mode can be shifted to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated during the probability setting value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with.
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only perform a pressing operation, it is not possible to distinguish between a transition operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) continues even during the probability setting value change mode, that is, the RAM initialization switch is started from the time the power is turned on. If 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

Specifically, in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process, the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is off, and the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is in the off state. When the state is on, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned on is the current input process. There is a high possibility that the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read by the process is the off state. That is, if the transition operation continues even during the probability set value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected. Therefore, in this case, if the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transition operation. There may be a problem that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the process of step X138 is performed, and the process of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. I will do it. As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability setting value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has continued since the power was turned on (that is, the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode). Since the input signal (rising edge) based on (operation) is ignored, it is possible to prevent an unintended update.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first game machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result. A storage means for storing one of a plurality of probability setting values to which the operation unit (setting key operation unit) and the second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) and the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM111C)) and a mode for shifting to a probability setting value change mode in which the probability setting value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the game machine is turned on. In response to the operation of the transition means (game control device 100) and the second operation unit in the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value stored in the storage means (value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM). ) Is provided with a setting changing means (game control device 100), an operation of the second operation unit (shift operation) for shifting to the probability setting value changing mode, and a second for changing the probability setting value. The operation (change operation) of the operation unit is the same operation (pressing operation in the case of this embodiment), and the setting changing means continues from the time when the power of the game machine is turned on even in the probability setting value changing mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the power of the game machine is turned on continues even after the transition to the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time, which is not intended. It is possible to prevent the change of the probability set value.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 42 shows the start port switch monitoring process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this start port switch monitoring process, first, a start port 1 (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process (step X492) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is information with a start opening prize that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the start opening prize is set based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (normal game state). (Step X494). Then, when the special figure has a low probability and there is no time reduction (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. Further, when the special figure has a low probability and the time is not shortened (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process (step X496) is performed.

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform a right-handed hit by display, voice, or the like. Right-handed is more advantageous for the player when in the specific game state or special game state, and the start winning opening 36, which is designed to win only when left-handed, is in the specific game state or special game state. When a prize is detected inside, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Then, a table for setting the holding information by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure start port switch common process (step X498) is performed. Next, the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table was prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process (step X500) was performed, and a jackpot random number was acquired based on the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning that is set in the case (step X501).

If the start port winning information is not set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the start port winning information is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), the normal electric (normal variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal. It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is activated to open the game ball in an open state (step X502), and if the normal power is operating (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X504. Transition. On the other hand, when the normal electric power is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the general electric power is being illegally generated (step X503).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If an illegal operation is occurring (step X503; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more. Further, when the general electric power fraud is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X504), and the special figure start port switch common process (step X505) is performed. Then, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
FIG. 43 shows the special figure start port switch common process (steps X498, X505) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

In this special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is sent to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal output count area (step X524), and the special figure hold (start) corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is held. It is determined whether the number of memory), that is, the number of special figure reservations (start memory) to be updated is less than the upper limit value (here, 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because the loop is looped by +1 update and becomes 0.

Then, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step X525; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step X527). Next, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM. (Step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Next, the fall lottery random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and saved in the fall lottery random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) has been won (step X534), and if the starting port 2 has not been won (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X534; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). ..

Then, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination processing (step X538), which is a look-ahead process, is performed. Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step X539), the effect command setting process (step X540) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit as the first starting memory. It serves as a starting memory means. Further, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the ordinary variable winning device 37, and can store the predetermined random number as the second starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. 2 Makes a start storage means.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
44 and 45 show a special figure hold information determination process (step X538) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (during the first special gaming state) (step X541), and if the jackpot is in progress (step X541; Y), the special figure reservation information determination is made. End the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not hit (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start opening switch common process is checked, and the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) is won. Is determined (step X542).

If the starting port 1 is won (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform look-ahead. On the other hand, if the starting port 1 is not won (step X542; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal gaming state) (step X543). Then, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step X543; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, the look-ahead is not performed. On the other hand, when it is not in the special figure low probability & time reduction (step X543; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in (step X544).

If the special figure is not in high probability (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, when the special figure is in high probability (step X544; Y), is the value of the fall lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the special figure start port switch common process within the range of the judgment value of the fall winning? Determine (step X545). Next, the look-ahead fall lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), the effect command setting process (step X547) is performed, and the low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit low probability determination value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X551), and prepared in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X552), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). It is determined whether or not the prize is won (step X553).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X553; Y), the small hit determination process (step X554) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value I do. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X557), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X555; N), the out-of-order stop symbol information is set (step X558), and the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557 or set in step X558. The stopped symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step X559).

After that, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X560), and the effect command setting process (step X561) is performed.
Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X563) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit high probability determination value). I do. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X565), and in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X564; N), the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). (Step X567).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X567; Y), the small hit determination process (step X568) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X571), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X569; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step X573).

Then, when the special figure is not in high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability (step X573; Y), the stop symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571 or the stop symbol information acquired in step X571 is set in the symbol information area in which the stop symbol information is saved in step X559. The stop symbol information set in the above is overwritten and saved (step X574). The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for pre-reading of fluctuation patterns and the like.

Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X575), and the effect command setting process (step X576) is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result of determination by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result of determination by the jackpot high probability determination value are transmitted to the effect control device 300. Will be done.
Next, the special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step X578) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. I do.
Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and the effect command setting process (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure hold information. End the process. The special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, the look-ahead fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead stop including the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target. A symbol command and a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including information on the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, whether or not the result-related information corresponding to the start memory (whether or not the jackpot probability state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state)) and whether or not the jackpot or small hit is achieved. , The determination result (pre-reading result) of the variation pattern) can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and is particularly displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decoration special figure start memory display to be performed.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means capable of determining the result of the variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). Make a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
FIG. 46 shows the look-ahead jackpot determination process (steps X549, X563) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process. In this look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step X581), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery of the big hit was lost.
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (step X583). When the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), the upper limit judgment value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, when it is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; N), that is, when it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step X588), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 47 shows the special figure 1 game processing (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In this special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag that is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). In the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) and the second special gaming state is executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game. , Is interrupted during the execution of the second special game state.

If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 variation display is performed. Perform game-related processing. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. Instead, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, the special gaming state executed based on whether the special figure 2 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the big hit or the small hit. It is determined whether it is inside (step Y101). Then, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y104. On the other hand, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y103) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Is processed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Regarding the special game state executed based on the fact that is a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. A process for generating a special gaming state is performed based on the setting of the specific area passage flag.

Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). Then, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y106). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired (step Y107), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y108).

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game are set. FIG. 1 Special figure 1 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 1 Ordinary processing (step Y109) is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1 are performed. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y110).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2" and the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 1 display processing (step Y111) is performed to set the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y112) to be performed is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special figure 1 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y115) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109). I do.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y116), the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y117) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed, and the lever solenoid is performed. The lever solenoid control process (step Y118) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is completed. This special figure 1 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control related to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
48 and 49 show a special figure 2 game process (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the special figure 1 game processing described above for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit, that is, in the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit (step). Y131). Then, when the jackpot in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y134. If the big hit in FIG. 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Is processed. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. A process for generating a special gaming state is performed based on the setting of the specific area passage flag.

Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). Then, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. Is determined (step Y136).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The fluctuation timer value (for example, 60,000 msec) is saved (step Y138), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times that the specified time (for example, 60,000 msec) is measured.

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. Set (step Y139). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is acquired using the table (step Y140), and a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y141).

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game are set. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Normal processing (step Y142) is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y143).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 2 display processing (step Y144) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special figure 2 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y147) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. The small hit fanfare middle process (step Y149) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y150) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. Do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y151) for setting the information necessary for performing the processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y153), the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y154) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid is performed. The lever solenoid control process (step Y155) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is completed. This special figure 2 game process performs a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the special figure 1 game processing described above for the special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel in.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start fluctuation (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 1 is not normally executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

If the special figure 1 is not capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; N), "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y217), Special Figure 1 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), the effect command setting process (step Y204) is performed, and the left-handed instruction notification flag is set. (Step Y205). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the specific game state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206), and if the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process (step Y208) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y210). ), The effect command setting process (step Y211) is performed. At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y212), and the effect command setting process (step Y213) is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y214). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any of 0 to 5 is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on the jackpot. The special figure status 5 indicates that the game is in the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y215) is performed to end the special figure 1 normal process.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 is in a state where the normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 cannot start changing (step Y221; N), "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239), Special Figure 2 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222).

Then, when the number of pending special figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and the effect command setting process (step Y224) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226). ), The effect command setting process (step Y227) is performed. At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y226), the special figure 2 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the current special figure 2 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number, which is -1 from the number, is prepared. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y228), and the effect command setting process (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y230). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y231) is performed to end the special figure 2 normal process.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y232). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has started (step Y234), and when it has not started (step Y234; N), the customer waiting demo has been started. Performs processing related to state setting. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y232; N), when special figure 1 is changing (step Y233; Y), or when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y234; Y). Goes to step Y238.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y235), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and the effect is produced. The command setting process (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the game state information, so that an appropriate effect cannot be performed. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, the effect control device 300 can perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command each time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. This makes it possible to return to the effect according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change in the game state to be transmitted. The customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
FIG. 52A shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y241). Next, a random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y242), and the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y243), a fall lottery process (step Y244) for drawing a transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the missed information or the jackpot information as the result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. The symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, in order to perform the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern, and to refer to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of the above is set, is prepared (step Y248).

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y250) is performed, and the time reduction variation number update process (step Y251) is performed. Next, "1" related to the special figure 1 changing process is set as the process number (step Y252), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y254), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. Here, 100 ms) is saved (step Y257), the initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during special figure 1 change (step Y258), and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed. To finish.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 52 (b) shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y261). Next, a random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y262), and the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y263), a fall lottery process (step Y264) for drawing a transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the missed information, the jackpot information, or the small hit information is performed as the result information of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Special figure 2 Stop symbol setting process (step Y266) is performed. Then, in order to perform the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern, and to refer to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of the above is set, is prepared (step Y268).

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y270) is performed, and the time reduction fluctuation start update process (step Y271) is performed. Next, "1" related to the special figure 2 changing process is set as the process number (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y274), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Here, 100 msec) is saved (step Y277), the initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during special figure 2 change (step Y278), and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is performed. To finish.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 53 shows a fall lottery process (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this fall lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (step Y581), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the fall lottery process ends. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y581; Y), it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582). In addition, winning the fall lottery means that the fall lottery random number matches the fall lottery determination value. The fall lottery judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the fall lottery random number is equal to or higher than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the fall lottery judgment value, and is the upper limit value of the fall lottery judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, it is determined that the fall lottery has been won.

If the value of the fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583).
If the value of the fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step X583; N), that is, when the fall lottery is won, the process for shifting to the low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, the signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON, and the big hit 4 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y586), and the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y587). After that, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the fall lottery process is completed. As a result, it becomes a low probability state and a state without normal electric support, and shifts to a normal game state. Information on the end of the high-probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 54A shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y282), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step Y283).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y284), and if it is a jackpot (step Y284; Y), the jackpot flag 1 is set. End the process. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is a jackpot (step Y286; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y281 (step). Y287), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is not a jackpot (step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 54 (b) shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of reservations 1). Step Y294).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and if it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step). Y298), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the large hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 55 shows the jackpot determination process (steps Y285, Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery of the big hit was lost. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (step Y313).

Then, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step Y316). Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step Y316).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, when it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 56 shows a small hit determination process (step Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or more than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; N), that is, when it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y324), and the small hit determination process is performed. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y246) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 1 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y338), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and proceed to step Y340. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the missed stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y341) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special figure 1 Stop The symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the special figure 2 rounds. Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y368), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and proceed to step Y370. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and if it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number. A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y376). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y377), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y378). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y379), and the process proceeds to step Y370.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y380), and the miss stop symbol pattern is set as a special figure. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y371) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373), and the special figure 2 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 displays the result and the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means of the first variation display game. It serves as the first decision-making means that can be decided before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 displays the result and the variation mode information of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the second start memory stored in the second start storage means of the second variation display game. It serves as a second decision-making means that can be decided before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the normal variable winning device 37 is the game ball fired on the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the second determination is made in the normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the means is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. Become.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing.
Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time elapses. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set, but in this case, the information about the variation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the variation is long. You may want to send a command that only indicates that. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on receiving the stop command. To do so. In this way, the burden of control on the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y402). It is determined whether or not the big hit of FIG. 1, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is the stop symbol pattern of the big hit (step Y403). In the case of a special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

If it is not a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y405), and the special figure 1 information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
In this way, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 hold number only in the first half fluctuation pattern in the case of a miss, and in the case of a big hit, consider the special figure 1 hold number. The fluctuation pattern is determined without.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 60 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (step Y421). Special figure Low probability & No time reduction When it is not in the middle (step Y421; N), it is determined whether it is the time reduction final variation (step Y427). Here, when the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time reduction final variation.

Then, in the case of the time reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), the process proceeds to step Y428. If it is not the time reduction final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424), the process proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether the final variation has a high probability (step Y427). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability.
Then, in the case of a high probability final fluctuation (step Y427; Y), the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (step Y428), and the process proceeds to step Y425.
If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 jackpot (step Y429). Then, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y429; N), the first half offset data for the low probability special figure 2 missed / small hit is set (step Y430), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. Is set (step Y432), and the process proceeds to step Y425.

Further, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (Step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y426), and the special figure 2 information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of reservations in the special figure 2.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and if the special figure 1 is off (step Y454; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step Y455) is performed. )I do. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), the sorting process (step Y456) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the hit size is 1 byte size, and the loss size is 2 byte size. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to enable a wider variety of effects, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Next, the distribution process (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1. Prepare (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 62 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holds 1) of FIG. 2 (step Y473).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y474), and if the special figure 2 is off (step Y474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step Y475) is performed. )I do. If the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y474; N), the sorting process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 2. And prepare (step Y478). Next, the distribution process (step Y479) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2. Prepare (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 63 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250, Y270) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y552), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y553). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y557).

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-mentioned added value, the remaining time (time less than 60,000 msec) excluding the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times that the specified time (here, 60,000 msec) is timed, is the added value. It is calculated as.

After that, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y558; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the long variation of the special figure 2 has started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set in the normal gaming state of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

Then, when it is not the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step Y559; N), 0 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y560). Further, when the long variation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y562), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y563), and the effect command setting process (step Y564) is performed. Do. Next, the number of pending targets is updated by -1 (step Y566), the contents of the target random number storage area are shifted (step Y566), the free area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the fluctuation start information is set. End the process.

In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the long variation of FIG. 2 in order to vary the time that is insufficient for the 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the timer of 60000 msec and the number of repetitions of 9 are saved as the addition result, the timer is subtracted by the timer interrupt process, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 to the game processing timer of 60000 m. Set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long variation of the special figure 2 becomes 10 minutes (= 60,000 ms × 10). Since the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, it can be expressed by multiplying by 60 seconds.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 64 shows the time reduction fluctuation number update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (in a high probability state) (step Y571), and if the special figure has a high probability (step Y571; Y), the time The shortened fluctuation count update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is not in high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure time is shortened (step Y572). Then, when the special time reduction is not in progress (step Y572; N), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step Y572; Y), the time reduction variation number is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the time reduction variation number is “0” (step Y574). ..

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step Y574; Y), the signal related to the end of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575). , Signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, normal electric accessory 1 open extension The status signal (OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578), and the normal figure game mode flag area is saved. The flag for no time reduction is saved in (step Y579), and the time reduction fluctuation number update process is completed.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 65 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the effect command setting process (step Y623) is performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process (step Y625) is performed. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game machine may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, when the fluctuation is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec is set in the case of a miss and 2000 msec in the case of a big hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. Further, if the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being performed (step Y629). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 2 is in progress (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. Further, when the special figure 2 is not being processed during display (step Y629; N), the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. The display time + 4 msec display time is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and the effect command setting process (step Y635) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), the effect command setting process (step Y638) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y638) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and the information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area. (Step Y640), the information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y643) is performed to perform the special figure 1 stop symbol area. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting process (step Y653) is performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec is set in the case of a miss, 600 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Further, if the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670) and the decorative special figure 1 is interrupted. A command is prepared (step Y671), an effect command setting process (step Y672) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y673.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of a special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display is being processed (step Y660). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. If the special figure 1 is not being processed during display (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the display time of the special figure 1 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. The display time + 4 msec display time is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process (step Y666) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process (step Y668) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and whether the special figure 2 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Determine (step Y674). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step). Y675), load information from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and save it in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678) is performed to perform the special figure 2 stop symbol area. Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
FIG. 67 shows the process during display of the special figure 1 (step Y111) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 display processing, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared. (Step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is the big hit information (step Y753), and when the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), the special figure 1 variation display game. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned on) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special diagram 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y755), and the effect command setting process (step Y756) is performed. After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and the effect command setting process (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the probability state.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y764) is performed to end the special figure 1 display processing.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is off information, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765), and it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765). In step Y765; N), it is determined whether or not the time reduction final variation is made (step Y766). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time reduction is the final variation.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y765; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y768) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770), and the small hit in Special Figure 2 is in progress, that is, Special Figure 2 It is determined whether or not the player is in a special gaming state to be executed based on the result of the variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

If the small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the process proceeds to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in FIG. 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing a left-handed strike is made. After that, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775), and the special figure 1 is Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
68 and 69 show the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. The special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear two regions (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 region is loaded (step Y813) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, and the jackpot flag 2 region is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is the big hit information (step Y815), and when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variation display game. The test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON and the special symbol 2 hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special diagram 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y817), and the effect command setting process (step Y818) is performed. After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and the effect command setting process (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the probability state.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y826) is performed to end the special figure 2 display processing.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, when the big hit flag 2 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). .. Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y827; Y), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y828), and when it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N), the time It is determined whether it is the shortened final variation (step Y829). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (support count) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final variation is achieved.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the player is not aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, a command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y834), and the effect command setting process (step Y835) is performed. Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), an effect command setting process (step Y837) is performed, and a signal related to a right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made.
After that, the area for the number of illegal prizes in the lower prize opening is cleared (step Y840), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the flag area for the illegal monitoring period in the lower prize opening (step Y841), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing is performed. The transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the process during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

Further, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843; N), the time is shortened. It is determined whether it is the final variation (step Y844). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (support count) from the end of the special game state, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final variation is achieved.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y843; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. Further, in the case of a high probability final variation (step Y843; Y) or a time reduction final variation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and an effect command is provided. The setting process (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y847), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851), and the special figure 2 is Ends the process being displayed.

That is, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has achieved the second special result. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
70 and 71 show fanfare / interval processing (steps Y112, Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y942).

If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, in the case of the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state is started by the game ball passing through the normal figure start gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variation display game. There is.

If the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y943; Y), the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is set. The value (10 in the case of the present embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y945). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening is cleared (step Y947), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag area of the illegal monitoring period of the upper winning opening (step Y948). After that, the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y950). Then, the round command corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and the effect command setting process (step Y952) is performed.

Next, the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y954), and the jackpot prize is won. The large winning opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). The initial value of the processing control pointer during the jackpot is set to 0 when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In this embodiment, long opening with V corresponds. Further, when opening once in one round, the jackpot operation end value (2 in the case of this embodiment) is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Next, it is determined whether the lever solenoid operation round is reached (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. Then, in the case of the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y960). Then, in the case of the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y960; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save to (step Y962). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960; N), that is, if it is the big hit of special figure 2, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y963), and the big winning opening is opened. The time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, the signal relating to the opening start of the upper prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y965). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening / closing member of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The number of large winning openings is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, in the special gaming state based on the jackpot (first special gaming state), only the upper prize opening (first special variable device 38) is open and small. In the special gaming state based on the hit (second special gaming state), only the lower grand prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing mode in the first special game state may be such that the upper prize opening is opened in the first round and the lower prize opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 72 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y115) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 jackpot end process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data has no time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1102) is performed. Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, a specific area passage flag is set when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area), and when this specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. .. If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the passage is irregular in a specific region, which is the inflow of the (step Y1107).

If the passage is not irregular in the specific region (step Y1107; N), the process proceeds to step Y1109. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in the specific area (step Y1107; Y), the irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108), and the effect command setting process (step Y1109) is performed. By the process of step Y1109, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands in which the production mode information is included in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation area, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 1 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1110), and the processing number is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing number area (step Y1111). Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1115), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (for example, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is ended.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, the special figure variation display game can be started for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing to start the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. 2 Variable display A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the game from being executed.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 73 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. The special figure 2 big hit end process is the same process except that step Y1109 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process is not performed. In this special figure 2 big hit end process, first, a subroutine call is performed based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). If the time reduction determination data has no time reduction in step Y1131, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction in step Y1131, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1131) is performed. Step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1134; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the passage is irregular in the specific region, which is the inflow of the (step Y1137).

If the passage is not irregular in the specific region (step Y1137; N), the process proceeds to step Y1139. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in the specific area (step Y1137; Y), the irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138), and the effect command setting process (step Y1139) is performed. By the process of step Y1139, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands in which the production mode information is included in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation area, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 2 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1140), and the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1141). Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1145), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1146), special figure 2 jackpot end processing is completed. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 74 (a) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102, 1132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal relating to the start without shortening the time is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, only the data is set and no output is made.

Next, the signal relating to the start without time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
After that, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1153), and the normal time reduction flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step Y1154). Next, the special figure low probability and no time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1157). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated. By this process, it becomes a normal game state.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 74 (b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the start of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start with a time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and ordinary electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1163), and the flag with the time reduction is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step Y1164). Next, the special figure low probability and time saving flags are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the initial time saving fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the time saving state is initially set. Save the value (step Y1166). In the case of this embodiment, since the number of times of support is 100, 100 is saved as an initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By this processing, it becomes the second specific game state with a low probability of special figure. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 75 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, the signal relating to the start of the special figure time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1171). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON. After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1173), and the special figure high probability and the time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1175). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated. By this processing, a high probability state is obtained. That is, by executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 1, the first specific game state is set, and by executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 2, the special figure high probability is achieved. It becomes the second specific game state.
By the above processing, it is possible to set a specific gaming state which is a high probability state after the end of the first special gaming state. That is, the game control device 100 has a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, special figure high probability second specific game state ST3) in which the probability that the result of the special variation display game becomes a special result is higher than the normal state. Is a means for generating a specific game state that can generate.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
FIG. 76 shows the small hit fanfare middle process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this small hit fanfare middle process, first, a small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1203), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is turned on) is a test signal. Save to the output data area (step Y1206). Then, the lower prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1207), the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1208), and the small The processing during the hit fanfare is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 77 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during the normal gaming state) (step Y1337), and if the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. To do. Further, when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (step Y1337; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y), the decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and the effect command setting process (step Y1342) is performed. After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is completed. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device 100 is operated by the variable display game execution control means of either the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) or the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the execution control of the variable display game of is performed, and the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one of the variable display games is played. It serves as a restart control means capable of executing restart control for resuming one of the variable display games that was interrupted after the special game state based on the other variable display game was completed.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 78 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 78, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the cross key 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the cross key 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the cross key 29, the effect content is changed. ..

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, the reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes the command from the game control device 100 and responds to it is performed, and the effect display editing process (step C13) that edits the setting and drawing command for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), a movable body control process (step C19) that controls the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the board effect device 44, and controls the effect by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 79 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of received commands is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. When it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. When it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 80 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, in steps C232 and C233, when it is determined that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or in step C234, it is determined that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of jackpot commands (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when the MODE determines that the range of the symbol-based command is within the range (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

<Look-ahead production>
As the look-ahead effect, the effect control device 300 can execute a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display.
FIG. 81 shows an example of the pending change effect. First, the display on the display device 41 in a predetermined gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state ST1) will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), a decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81 for displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation is provided in the central portion of the display area of the display device 41. The decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81 displays the decoration special figure variation display game by displaying the decoration identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the display.

At the lower part of the display area of the display device 41, a waiting hold display unit 82 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested start memory is provided. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby hold display unit 82 has a one-to-one correspondence with the start memory corresponding to the main fluctuation, and is displayed side by side in the memory order. In the example shown in FIG. 81, It shows that there are three start memories corresponding to the main fluctuation. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested. In addition, the waiting hold display unit 82 can suggest the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

On the left side of the waiting hold display unit 82, an executing hold display unit 83 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the currently executing special figure variation display game is provided. At the start of the main fluctuation, the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the waiting hold display unit 82 is transferred to the execution hold display unit 83. Further, in the execution hold display unit 83, it is possible to suggest the result of the main fluctuation to be executed, the fluctuation pattern, and the like by the display mode.

The effect control device 300 executes an operation promotion effect that urges the player to operate the effect button 25 before executing the hold change effect. In the operation promotion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 81B, the display position of the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81 moves to the upper right portion of the display area of the display device 41, and is centered on the display area of the display device 41. An effect button image 84a imitating the effect button 25, a notification image 84b (for example, a time bar image) for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period, and a designated image 84c (for example, a designated image 84c) for designating the operation mode of the effect button 25. An operation promotion image 84 including a character image such as "press!" Or "three consecutive hits!") Is displayed.

Then, the effect control device 300 executes the hold change effect when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode specified during the operation valid period, while the effect button 25 operates in the operation mode designated during the operation valid period. If this is not done, the hold change effect is not executed. In the hold change effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (c), among the decoration special figure start memory displays displayed on the standby hold display unit 82, the decoration feature corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the hold change effect. Figure The display mode (eg, color) of the start memory display changes from a normal display mode (eg, white) to a specific display mode (eg, red or blue).

In the present embodiment, the colors of the decorative special figure start memory display are such that the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit (or the degree of expectation of becoming a predetermined fluctuation pattern)) increases in the order of white <blue <red. .. Hereinafter, the red decorative special figure start memory display is referred to as "red hold", and the blue decorative special figure start memory display is referred to as "blue hold".
The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display that changes due to the hold change effect is not limited to the color of the decorative special figure start memory display. That is, in the hold change effect, the color of the decorative special figure start memory display may change, the shape of the decorative special figure start memory display may change, and the size of the decorative special figure start memory display changes. Alternatively, at least two of the colors, shapes, and sizes of the decorative special drawing start memory display may be changed.
Further, when the effect button 25 is not operated in the designated operation mode during the operation valid period, the hold change effect may be executed after the operation valid period ends.
Further, the hold change effect may be executed without executing the operation promotion effect.

<Reach production>
As the reach effect, the effect control device 300 has a normal reach effect, a weak SP reach effect (for example, a special 1 reach effect) that is expected to be a big hit than the normal reach effect, and an expectation degree to be a big hit than the weak SP reach effect. It is possible to perform a high strong SP reach effect (for example, a special 3 reach effect).
For example, in the variable command process (step C236) of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80), the effect control device 300 sets information for performing an effect according to the variable command from the game control device 100. Specifically, when the variable system command from the game control device 100 is a variable system command including information on a variable pattern for executing the reach effect, information for performing the reach effect is set. As a result, the reach effect is executed in the special figure variation display game to be started from now on.

Here, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect includes, at least, a variation pattern ending in the normal reach effect, a variation pattern ending in the weak SP reach effect, and a variation pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect.
Further, the variation pattern ending in the weak SP reach effect includes at least a pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed and a pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is suddenly executed without executing the normal reach effect. ..
Further, the fluctuation patterns ending in the strong SP reach effect include at least pattern A, pattern B, pattern C, and pattern D.

Pattern A is a pattern in which a weak SP reach effect is executed after the execution of the normal reach effect, and a strong SP reach effect is executed after the execution of the weak SP reach effect.
FIG. 82 shows an example of pattern A. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), when the special figure variation display game ends, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running hold display unit 83 disappears.
Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the waiting hold display unit 82 shifts to the running hold display unit 83. The display is done. Here, the execution hold display unit 83 also suggests the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like in the same manner as the look-ahead effect. Further, in the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is started, and the variation display of the decoration identification information is displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas. To be started.

When the special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game that executes a strong SP reach effect of pattern A, the normal reach effect starts when the first half variation ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (c). In addition, the same decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in the left variation display area and the right variation display area of the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81. In the temporarily stopped state, the decorative identification information is displayed in a swaying manner, indicating that the decoration is not completely stopped.
Next, it develops into a weak SP reach effect, and as shown in FIGS. It is in a state of being moved to the left corner and the right corner, and an effect by a development symbol or the like is displayed in the center of the display area.

Then, it develops into a strong SP reach effect, and as shown in FIGS. The effect by the character or the like is displayed in the center of the display area while moving to the left corner and the right corner.
Then, when the latter half variation ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (h), the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81, and the special figure variation display game ends. To do.

Further, the pattern B is a pattern in which the strong SP reach effect is executed without executing the weak SP reach effect after the execution of the normal reach effect.
FIG. 83 shows an example of pattern B. 83 is different from FIG. 82 only in that there are no FIGS. 82 (d) and 82 (e), and the other points are the same as those in FIG. 82. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pattern C is a pattern in which the strong SP reach effect is suddenly executed without executing the normal reach effect and the weak SP reach effect.
FIG. 84 shows an example of pattern C. 84 is different from FIG. 82 only in that there is no FIG. 82 (c), (d), and (e), and other points are the same as those in FIG.

Further, the pattern D is a pattern in which a strong SP reach effect is executed after executing a pseudo-continuous effect in which the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle of the special figure variation display game and then the revariation effect is displayed one or more times. is there. In pattern D, the normal reach effect and the weak SP reach effect are not executed.
FIG. 85 shows an example of pattern D. For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the special figure variation display game ends, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running hold display unit 83 disappears.
Next, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the waiting hold display unit 82 shifts to the running hold display unit 83. The display is done. Here, the execution hold display unit 83 also suggests the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like in the same manner as the look-ahead effect. Further, in the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is started, and the variation display of the decoration identification information is displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas. To be started.

When the special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game that executes a strong SP reach effect of pattern D, the pseudo continuous effect starts when the first half variation ends, and is shown in FIG. 85 (c), for example. As shown in FIG. 85 (d), after the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 81 in a result mode other than the hit result mode. As shown, the re-variable display of the decorative identification information is started in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 81.
Next, it develops into a strong SP reach effect, and as shown in FIGS. 85 (e) and 85 (f), for example, the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game display unit 81 are display areas, respectively. It is in a state of being moved to the left corner and the right corner, and an effect by a character or the like is displayed in the center of the display area.
Then, when the latter half variation ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 85 (g), the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81, and the special figure variation display game ends. To do.

The fluctuation pattern ending in the above-mentioned normal reach effect is, for example, a pattern of FIG. 82 (a) → (b) → (c) → (h).
Further, among the fluctuation patterns ending in the weak SP reach effect described above, the pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect is executed is, for example, FIG. 82 (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). → (e) → (h).
Further, among the fluctuation patterns ending in the weak SP reach effect described above, the pattern in which the weak SP reach effect is suddenly executed without executing the normal reach effect is, for example, FIG. 82 (a) → (b) → (d) → It is a pattern that changes from (e) to (h).

Further, FIG. 85 shows a pseudo-continuous effect in which the number of times of the re-variation effect (the effect of temporarily stopping and displaying the decoration identification information and then displaying the re-variation) is once, but the re-variation executed in the pseudo-continuous effect The number of times of production may be multiple times.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, the execution hold display unit 83 also suggests the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, and the like in the same manner as the look-ahead effect. Specifically, the decorative special figure start memory display of the specific display mode (red hold (decorative special figure start memory display with diagonal hatching in the figure) and blue hold (decorative special figure start with polka dot hatching in the figure) (Memory display)) has been transferred from the waiting hold display unit 82 to the running hold display unit 83. That is, FIGS. 82 to 85 illustrate the case where the reach effect is executed in the special figure variation display game that is the target of the hold change effect, but of course, the special figure variation display game that is not the target of the hold change effect. It is also possible to perform a reach effect in.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, the effect mode of the normal reach effect (FIG. 82 (c)) executed when the pattern A is set and the effect of the normal reach effect executed when the pattern B is set. Although the aspect (FIG. 83 (c)) is the same, the effect mode of the normal reach effect may be different between the pattern A and the pattern B.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, when the pattern A is set, the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect (FIGS. 82 (f) and (g)) and the pattern B are set. The effect mode of the strong SP reach effect to be executed (FIGS. 83 (d), (e)) and the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect to be executed when the pattern C is set (FIGS. 84 (c), (d)). And the effect mode (FIGS. 85 (e) and (f)) of the strong SP reach effect executed when the pattern D is set are the same, but the pattern A, the pattern B, the pattern C, and the pattern D are the same. The production mode of the strong SP reach effect may be different.

Here, the fluctuation pattern that ends with the strong SP reach effect will be described.
In the present embodiment, at least pattern A (normal → weak SP → strong SP), pattern B (normal → strong SP), pattern C (strong SP), and pattern D (pseudo) are used as fluctuation patterns ending in the strong SP reach effect. Four fluctuation patterns of continuous → strong SP) are prepared.
Then, in the special figure variation display game that is the target of the hold change effect that changes to red hold, pattern C is easier to select than pattern A, pattern D is easier to select than pattern C, and patterns A to D. Among them, pattern B is most likely to be selected.

Further, in the special figure variation display game that is the target of the hold change effect that changes to blue hold, which has a lower expectation than red hold, pattern A is more likely to be selected than pattern C, and pattern C is selected rather than pattern D. Pattern B is most likely to be selected among patterns A to D.
That is, the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit is higher in the order of pattern B <pattern A <pattern C <pattern D.

When the start memory is generated, the game control device 100 transmits a look-ahead command related to the start memory to the effect control device 300. The look-ahead command includes information on the fluctuation pattern and information on the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory of the read-ahead target. This variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.
Further, the game control device 100 transmits a variable system command to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display. The variable command includes information on the variable pattern corresponding to the start memory of the variable target. This fluctuation pattern is also determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table.

FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) show a part of the fluctuation pattern table. The table shown in FIG. 86A is an example of an out-of-order variation pattern table for the special figure 1 variation display game, and the type and selection rate of the variation pattern in the normal game state ST1 are defined. Further, the table shown in FIG. 86B is an example of a jackpot variation pattern table for the special figure 1 variation display game, and the type and selection rate of the variation pattern in the normal game state ST1 are defined.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the game control device 100, the current game state is the normal game state ST1, and the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target is the special figure 1 variation display game. 1 When the result of the variation display game is out of order, for example, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 86 (a), and a look-ahead command including the information of the variation pattern is output to the effect control device 300. Send to.
Further, in the game control device 100, the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game. When the result is a big hit, for example, the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 86B, and a look-ahead command including the information of the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Further, in the game control device 100, the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the change target is the special figure 1 change display game, and the special figure 1 change display game. When the result is out of order, for example, the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 86A, and the fluctuation system command including the information of the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
Further, in the game control device 100, the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the change target is the special figure 1 change display game, and the special figure 1 change display game. When the result is a big hit, for example, the fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 86 (b), and the fluctuation system command including the information of the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target is out of order, the pattern D (pseudo-ream →) is included in the variation pattern ending with the strong SP reach effect. (Strong SP) is the most difficult to select, pattern C (strong SP) is more difficult to select than pattern A (normal → weak SP → strong SP), and pattern B (normal → strong SP) is most easily selected. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target is a big hit, the selection rates of the patterns A to D are the same. That is, the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit increases in the order of pattern B <pattern A <pattern C <pattern D.
In the example shown in FIG. 86 (b), the variation pattern without reach can be selected even in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit, but there is no reach in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a jackpot. It may be configured so that the fluctuation pattern cannot be selected.

When the effect control device 300 receives the look-ahead command from the game control device 100, for example, whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the look-ahead variation command process (step C246) of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). And hold change effect lottery to determine the effect mode of hold change effect. This hold change effect lottery is performed with reference to, for example, the hold change effect distribution table.
FIG. 86 (c) shows a part of the pending change effect distribution table. The table shown in FIG. 86 (c) is an example of a pending change effect distribution table for a special figure 1 variation display game, which is referred to when a look-ahead command including information on a variation pattern ending in a strong SP reach effect is received. The effect mode and selection rate of the hold change effect in the normal game state ST1 are defined. When a look-ahead command including information on a fluctuation pattern ending in a strong SP reach effect is received, a common hold change effect distribution table is used regardless of the stop symbol information included in the look-ahead command. ..

That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 is a look-ahead command that includes information on a variation pattern in which the current game state is the normal game state ST1 and the received look-ahead command ends with a strong SP reach effect. When the special figure variable display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target is the special figure 1 variable display game, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game may be out of order or a big hit, for example, the figure. The hold change effect lottery is performed with reference to the hold change effect distribution table shown in 86 (c).
Then, when the "first effect mode" is selected in the hold change effect lottery, the hold change effect that changes the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead target to red hold is executed. Further, when the "second effect mode" is selected in the hold change effect lottery, the hold change effect for changing the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead target to blue hold is executed. Further, when "non-execution" is selected in the hold change effect lottery, the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead target is not executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), when a look-ahead command including information of pattern A is received as a variation pattern ending in a strong SP reach effect, the "first effect mode" is most difficult to select, and ""Non-execution" is the easiest to select.
In the present embodiment, when a look-ahead command including information on a fluctuation pattern ending in a strong SP reach effect is received, a common hold change effect distribution is performed regardless of the result of the special figure variation display game to be read ahead. Although the table (Fig. 86 (c)) is used, it is possible to use a different pending change effect distribution table depending on whether the result of the special figure variation display game to be read ahead is a big hit or not. good.

FIG. 86 (d) shows the relationship between the effect mode of the hold change effect and the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect, which are derived from FIGS. 86 (a), (b) and 86 (c).
For example, as shown in FIGS. 86A and 86B, about 30% of the look-ahead commands including the information of the fluctuation pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect transmitted from the game control device 100 is the information of the pattern A. About 40% is a look-ahead command that includes pattern B information, about 20% is a look-ahead command that includes pattern C information, and about 10% is a look-ahead command that includes pattern D information. This is a look-ahead command.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), when a look-ahead command including the information of the pattern A is received, the "first effect mode" is selected at a ratio of 4/30, and a ratio of 6/30. "Second effect mode" is selected, and "non-execution" is selected at a rate of 20/30. That is, about 4% of the look-ahead commands including the information of the fluctuation pattern ending in the strong SP reach effect transmitted from the game control device 100 are the look-ahead commands including the information of the pattern A, and "the first effect mode". Is a look-ahead command in which "" is selected, about 6% is a look-ahead command containing information on pattern A, and "second effect mode" is selected, and about 20% is a look-ahead command in pattern A. This is a look-ahead command that contains information and for which "non-execution" is selected.

Therefore, if there is no change in the game state or the like between the time of transmitting the look-ahead command and the time of transmitting the variable command, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (d), it is the target of the hold change effect that changes to red hold. In the special figure variation display game, the strong SP reach effect of pattern B is most easily executed among the strong SP reach effects, and the strong SP reach effect of pattern C is more likely to be executed than the strong SP reach effect of pattern A. , The strong SP reach effect of pattern D is easier to execute than the strong SP reach effect of pattern C.
Further, in the special figure variation display game targeted for the hold change effect that changes to blue hold, the strong SP reach effect of pattern B is most easily executed among the strong SP reach effects, and the strong SP reach of pattern C is most likely to be executed. The strong SP reach effect of pattern A is easier to be executed than the effect, and the strong SP reach effect of pattern C is easier to be executed than the strong SP reach effect of pattern D.

That is, before executing the special figure variation display game in which the variation pattern ending with the strong SP reach effect is set, the look-ahead effect for the special figure variation display game is changed to red hold, which has a higher expectation than blue hold. When the pending change effect is performed, as the strong SP reach effect, of the strong SP reach effect of pattern A and the strong SP reach effect of pattern C, the strong SP reach effect of pattern C, which has a higher expectation, is used. Of the strong SP reach effect of pattern C and the strong SP reach effect of pattern D, the strong SP reach effect of pattern D, which has a higher degree of expectation, is easier to execute.

In addition, before executing the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation pattern ending with the strong SP reach effect is set, the look-ahead effect for the special figure variation display game is changed to blue hold, which is less expected than red hold. When the pending change effect is performed, as the strong SP reach effect, of the strong SP reach effect of pattern A and the strong SP reach effect of pattern C, the strong SP reach effect of pattern A, which has a lower expectation, is used. Of the pattern C strong SP reach effect and the pattern D strong SP reach effect, the pattern C strong SP reach effect, which has a lower expectation, is easier to execute.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect of the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) performed before the strong SP reach effect is produced according to the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect (the process until the strong SP reach effect is developed). The modes can be sorted.

When a hold change effect that changes to red hold is performed as a look-ahead effect, the expectation that a strong SP reach effect will be executed is higher than when a hold change effect that changes to blue hold is performed. .. Therefore, when the hold change effect that changes to red hold is performed, if the strong SP reach effect of pattern A that goes through the normal reach and the weak SP reach is executed, a feeling of delay or boredom will occur, and the interest of the reach effect will be reduced. There is a risk of doing so. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the hold change effect that changes to red hold is performed, the strong SP reach effect of pattern A is the most difficult to be executed among the strong SP reach effects, so that the delay is extended. The feeling of feeling and boredom is reduced, and the appeal of reach production can be enhanced.

If the strong SP reach effect that is most easily executed is changed to the strong SP reach effect of the pattern C in which the strong SP reach suddenly occurs, it is possible to effectively reduce the feeling of delay and boredom. However, since the strong SP reach effect of pattern C has the shortest fluctuation time among the strong SP reach effects (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)), if the selection rate of the strong SP reach effect of pattern C is increased, There is a risk that the number of prize balls paid out per unit time will be too large. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the look-ahead effect, both when the hold change effect changing to red hold is performed and when the hold change effect changing to blue hold is performed, the variation is higher than that of pattern A. Since the strong SP reach effect of pattern B, which has a shorter time and a longer fluctuation time than pattern C, is the easiest to execute in the strong SP reach effect, the number of prize balls paid out per unit time becomes too large. It won't end up.

Further, the strong SP reach effect of the pattern D is different from the strong SP reach effect of other patterns in that pseudo-continuous fluctuation occurs, so that there is a special feeling. Then, in the present embodiment, the strong SP reach effect of the pattern D includes a hold change effect that changes to red hold and a hold change effect that changes to blue hold, and a hold change effect that changes to red hold, which has a higher degree of expectation. It is easier to execute after it is done (see FIG. 86 (d)). Therefore, since it is possible to execute a special strong SP reach effect (that is, a strong SP reach effect of pattern D) in a state where the expectation is higher, it is possible to meet the expectation of the player and further enhance the expectation. It is possible to enhance the interest of reach production.

Of course, before executing the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation pattern that ends with the weak SP reach effect is set, the hold change effect that changes to blue hold or red hold as a look-ahead effect for the special figure change display game is performed. It may be performed, and before the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the fluctuation pattern that ends with the normal reach effect is set, the hold that changes to blue hold or red hold as a look-ahead effect for the special figure change display game. A change effect may be performed, and before the special figure change display game in which a variation pattern without reach is set is executed, the game changes to blue hold or red hold as a look-ahead effect for the special figure change display game. A pending change effect may be performed.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed (special figure variable display game) is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, it is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state, a variation pattern selecting means (game control device 100) for selecting a variation pattern of a game and a variation for executing a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means. It is equipped with a production means (effect control device 300), and the variable production means are a first reach effect (normal reach effect), a second reach effect (weak SP reach effect), and a third reach effect (strong SP reach effect). As a variation pattern for executing the third reach effect (a variation pattern ending with a strong SP reach effect), the variation pattern selection means executes the second reach effect after the execution of the first reach effect. , The first pattern (pattern A) in which the third reach effect is executed after the execution of the second reach effect, and the third pattern (pattern A) in which the third reach effect is executed without executing the second reach effect after the execution of the first reach effect. Two patterns (Pattern B) and a third pattern (Pattern C) in which the third reach effect is executed without executing the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be selected, and the first pattern and the second pattern can be selected. Of the patterns and the third pattern, the fluctuation pattern with the highest expectation that the game result will be a special result is the third pattern, and the fluctuation pattern with the lowest expectation that the game result will be a special result is the second pattern. Yes (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)).
That is, the fluctuation pattern having the highest expectation among the first pattern (pattern A), the second pattern (pattern B), and the third pattern (pattern C) is the third fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Therefore, it is possible to quickly suggest that the degree of expectation is high, and it is possible to enhance the interest of reach production.

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the advance notice effect means (effect control device 300) for executing the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result. ), And the effect mode of the advance notice effect includes a first effect mode (for example, red hold) and a second effect mode (for example, blue hold) that can be suggested less than the first effect mode. When the effect mode of the advance notice effect is the first effect mode, the third pattern (pattern C) is more likely to be selected than the first pattern (pattern A) as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the advance notice effect, and the advance notice is provided. When the effect mode of the effect is the second effect mode, the first pattern (pattern A) is more easily selected than the third pattern (pattern C) as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the advance notice effect. (See FIG. 86 (d)).
With this configuration, when the advance notice effect of the first effect mode (for example, the hold change effect that changes to red hold) is performed, the first reach effect (normal reach effect) and the second reach effect are performed. The third pattern (pattern C) that does not undergo the first reach effect and the second reach effect is more likely to be selected than the first pattern (pattern A) that undergoes the reach effect (weak SP reach effect). Therefore, the feeling of delay and boredom is reduced, and the appeal of reach production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect mode of the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) is the first effect mode (for example, red hold), the game (special figure variation) that is the target of the advance notice effect. When the second pattern (pattern B) is more likely to be selected than the third pattern (pattern C) as the variation pattern of the display game) and the effect mode of the advance notice effect is the second effect mode (for example, blue hold), the relevant pattern is applicable. It can be configured so that the second pattern (pattern B) is more easily selected than the first pattern (pattern A) as the variation pattern of the game to be the target of the advance notice effect (see FIG. 86 (d)).
With this configuration, the second pattern (pattern B) has a shorter fluctuation time than the first pattern (pattern A) and a longer fluctuation time than the third pattern (pattern C) regardless of the production mode of the advance notice effect. ) Is the easiest to select. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls paid out per unit time from becoming too large while reducing the feeling of delay and boredom.

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed (special figure variable display game) is executed, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, it is advantageous to the player. In a game machine capable of generating a special game state, a variation pattern selection means (game control device 100) for selecting a variation pattern of a game and a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means are executed. A means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the variable effect means includes a reach effect in which a reach state in which the result can be a special result is displayed as an effect depending on the identification information to be stopped and displayed at the end, and a plurality of reach effects in one game. It is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect that can execute a pseudo-variable display that simulates the variation display of the identification information of the times, and the variation pattern selection means is a variation pattern (strong SP reach effect) that executes a specific reach effect. As a variable pattern ending with (pattern A), the first pattern (pattern A) in which the specific reach effect is executed after the execution of the reach effect (normal reach effect or weak SP reach effect) different from the specific reach effect (strong SP reach effect). And pattern B), the second pattern (pattern D) that executes the specific reach effect after executing the pseudo-continuous effect, and the specific without executing the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect different from the specific reach effect. The third pattern (Pattern C) for executing the reach effect of is selectable, and among the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern, the fluctuation pattern with the highest expectation that the result of the game will be a special result. Is the second pattern, and the fluctuation pattern with the lowest expectation that the result of the game is a special result is the first pattern (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)).
That is, among the fluctuation patterns that execute a specific reach effect (variation patterns that end with a strong SP reach effect), the variation pattern with the highest expectation is the second pattern that undergoes a pseudo-continuous effect that is not executed by other patterns ( Pattern D). Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the expectation is high with a special fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to enhance the interest of reach production.

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the advance notice effect means (effect control device 300) for executing the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result. ), And the effect mode of the advance notice effect includes a first effect mode (for example, red hold) and a second effect mode (for example, blue hold) that can be suggested less than the first effect mode. When the effect mode of the advance notice effect is the first effect mode, the second pattern (pattern D) is more likely to be selected than the third pattern (pattern C) as the variation pattern of the game subject to the advance notice effect, and the advance notice is provided. When the effect mode of the effect is the second effect mode, the third pattern (pattern C) is more easily selected than the second pattern (pattern D) as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the advance notice effect. (See FIG. 86 (d)).
With this configuration, when a notice effect of the first effect mode with higher expectation (for example, a hold change effect that changes to red hold) is performed, a pseudo continuous effect that is not executed in other patterns is performed. The second pattern (pattern D) is easily selected. Therefore, it is possible to meet the expectations of the player and further increase the expectations, and to enhance the interest of the reach production.

Note that the advance notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the game (special figure variation display game) will be a special result is not limited to the advance notice effect (look-ahead effect) performed before the execution of the game, and is performed during the execution of the game. It may be a notice production to be performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the production mode of the reach effect performed in the game is distributed according to the production mode of the advance notice effect performed before the execution of the game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game is being executed (that is, that is). , The production mode of the reach effect performed in the game may be distributed according to the production mode of the advance notice effect performed during the first half fluctuation (during the fluctuation before the start of the reach).

Specifically, for example, during the first half fluctuation, as a notice effect, a step-up effect of the first effect mode (for example, a step-up effect that ends in three stages) and a second effect having a lower expectation than the first effect mode. The effect mode of the strong SP reach effect (for the strong SP reach effect) so that the step-up effect of the mode (for example, the step-up effect that ends in one step) can be executed and the relationship is as shown in FIG. Depending on the process until the development), the production mode of the advance notice production (step-up production) performed before the strong SP reach production may be assigned.

Alternatively, for example, during the first half fluctuation, as a preview effect, a pseudo-continuous effect of the first effect mode (pseudo-continuous effect with three re-variation effects) and a second effect having a lower expectation than the first effect mode. The production mode of the strong SP reach effect (strong SP) so that the pseudo-continuous effect of the mode (pseudo-continuous effect in which the number of re-variation effects is one) can be executed and the relationship is as shown in FIG. 86 (d), for example. Depending on the process until it develops into the reach effect), it may be distributed according to the effect mode of the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous effect) performed before the strong SP reach effect.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 23 Lower plate (storage part)
25 Production button (operation unit)
100 Game control device (variable pattern selection means)
153 Precision plate unit (operating means)
232 ball outlet (through hole)
233 Opening and closing door (opening and closing member)
252d LED board (board)
252e Front side guide recess (guidance means)
252f Left side guide recess (guidance means)
252g Right side guide recess (guidance means)
258b groove (guidance means)
267a 1st front water storage section (delay means)
268a 1st left water storage section (delay means)
269a 1st right water storage section (delay means)
300 production control device (variable production means, notice production means)
D22, D23 Distance D3 Diameter (width of through hole)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed and the result of the game becomes a special result.
A variation pattern selection means for selecting the variation pattern of the game, and
A variation effect means for executing a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means is provided.
The variable effect means can execute the first reach effect, the second reach effect, and the third reach effect.
The variation pattern selection means uses the variation pattern for executing the third reach effect as a variation pattern.
A first pattern in which the second reach effect is executed after the execution of the first reach effect, and the third reach effect is executed after the execution of the second reach effect, and
After executing the first reach effect, a second pattern in which the third reach effect is executed without executing the second reach effect, and
The first reach effect and the third pattern in which the third reach effect is executed without executing the second reach effect can be selected.
Of the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern, the fluctuation pattern with the highest expectation that the result of the game will be a special result is the third pattern, and the result of the game is a special result. A game machine characterized in that the fluctuation pattern having the lowest expectation is the second pattern. A notice effect means for executing a notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result is provided.
The effect mode of the advance notice effect includes a first effect mode and a second effect mode having a lower expectation that can be suggested than the first effect mode.
When the effect mode of the advance notice effect is the first effect mode, the third pattern is more likely to be selected than the first pattern as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the advance notice effect.
When the effect mode of the advance notice effect is the second effect mode, the first pattern is more likely to be selected than the third pattern as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the advance notice effect. The game machine according to claim 1. When the effect mode of the advance notice effect is the first effect mode, the second pattern is more likely to be selected than the third pattern as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the advance notice effect.
When the effect mode of the advance notice effect is the second effect mode, the second pattern is more likely to be selected than the first pattern as the variation pattern of the game that is the target of the advance notice effect. The game machine according to claim 2.

Images